JP2018201702A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine includes an accessory device 150 provided with an open/close accessory 168. When being shifted to a second open/close execution mode, a round game in which variable ball entry control for opening/closing an open/close accessory 168 is performed at least once is executed. In the accessory device 150, a V winning sensor is provided. A game ball passing through the sensor triggers execution of a next round game. In the present pachinko machine, a game ball having entered the accessory device 150 for winning in a previous round game is allowed to pass through the V winning sensor in a round game to be executed after the previous round game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having a variable pitching device is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-325811 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to the game is desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
Launching means for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable input that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first mode. Ball means;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
The variable entry control means for performing variable entry control according to the second aspect from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the second aspect,
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition;
A passing portion through which a game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass;
With
In the specific game, when the game ball passes through the passing portion, it is a configuration that is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball does not pass,
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of the specific games is the first game. It is characterized by comprising specifying means for enabling passage through the passage section in a second specific game executed after the specific game.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a front view of a back pack unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows the structure of an accessory apparatus, (b) is a top view which shows simply the structure of the channel | path provided in the accessory apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows an accessory apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the rotary body unit which comprises an accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a result table, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a classification table, (c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an open | release timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed with MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a game stop determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a control start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during control. It is a flow chart which shows processing for an operation part in an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st distribution pattern table, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd distribution pattern table, (c) is based on the combination of a distribution pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution characteristic. It is a flowchart which shows the process for open | release. It is a flowchart which shows a round update process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for passing in an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball determination process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game in 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game property of each round game. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of residual sphere monitoring. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game in 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball determination process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game in 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for open | release during the 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game in the 2nd round game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open | release timing table which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows a remaining sphere determination process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game after completion | finish of 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game after completion | finish of 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of residual sphere determination. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open | release timing table which concerns on 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows a game control process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball determination process. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game when the standby time for shutter opening passes without generating the 1st opening and closing execution mode. 12 is a timing chart for explaining a game flow when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the standby time for opening the shutter elapses. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between opening waiting time and the flow of the game which concerns on 1st opening / closing execution mode. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the rotary body unit which comprises the accessory apparatus based on 7th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round, (b) is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an opening-and-closing member. (A), (b) is a flowchart which shows a round update process, (c) is a flowchart which shows the process for operation | movement parts in an accessory. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game in 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows another example of a gaming machine.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. In addition, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of making the gaming machine main body 12 locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window part 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display light emitting part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects according to the game situation.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71.

  A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. When the firing handle 60 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13 toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 60, the launch strength of the game ball launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum is changed.

  The game area is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism when the player rotates the launch handle 60 The guide rail 34 guides the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a range defined as a game area on the game board 24 by router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 35, a first operation opening (first start entry section) 38, a second operation opening (second start entry section) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 35, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 150, a detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) disposed on the back side of the game board 24 is generated. The second actuation sensor 39c and the inlet sensor 179 (see FIG. 10 and the like)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operation port 38 and a ball enters the second operation port 39, 7 prize balls are paid out, and the general game port 35 is entered. When a ball is generated, eight prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the second operation port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 38. The number may be different.

  In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 45. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 46 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being included is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 45, the game ball to the accessory device 150, the first operation port 38, the second operation port 39, or the through gate 41 is used. We refer to winning as winning.

  The accessory device 150 is disposed in a substantially central portion of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are juxtaposed in the lateral direction below the accessory device 150 in the game board 24. Two first operation ports 38 are provided on the left and right of the accessory device 150, and the second operation ports 39 are disposed at positions sandwiched by the left and right first operation ports 38. In relation to the accessory device 150, the left and right first operation ports 38 are disposed so as to sandwich the accessory device 150, and a game ball that has not won a prize in the accessory device 150 is one of the first operation ports. It is possible to reach 38 (winning is possible). Further, the lateral distance between both the first operation ports 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and there is a gap between the first operation port 38 and the accessory device 150. A game ball can flow down.

  The second operating port 39 is disposed below the accessory device 150. The second operation port 39 is disposed slightly below the first operation ports 38, and game balls that have not entered the accessory device 150 or the first operation port 38 can reach the second operation port 39. (Can enter).

  The second working port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric combination 39a is connected to an electric combination drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 39a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 39.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a winning of a game ball to the second operating port 39 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which a winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the electric accessory 39a is switched. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have the electric accessory 39a, and is switched by the displacement of the 2nd operation port 39 itself between the state where it is hard to generate | occur | produce a prize and the state where it is hard to generate | occur | produce a prize.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decoration member 47 extends from the surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39 is clearly indicated by the display of a pattern or the like.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, the design displayed on the main display unit 43 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The displayed configuration can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 41 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 41 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 39a provided in the second working port 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  A first reserved light emitting portion 54 and a second reserved light emitting portion 55 corresponding to the main display portion 43 are provided below the main display portion 43 of the decorative member 47. The first hold light-emitting unit 54 has a plurality of (four in detail) light-emitting units arranged side by side on the left and right, and the maximum number of game balls won in the first operation port 38 is held, and the first hold light-emission is held. The reserved number is displayed by lighting the part 54. The second hold light emitting section 55 is arranged in a plurality of light emitting sections arranged side by side (specifically, four), and the number of game balls won in the second operation port 39 is held up to four, and the second hold light emitting section is held. The reserved number is displayed by lighting the part 55. Further, a third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the accessory display unit 44 in the decorative member 47. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 56. In addition, the structure etc. by which one part or all part of the pending | holding light emission parts 54-56 are displayed by a part of symbol display apparatus 51 may be sufficient.

  The accessory device 150 is in an open state on the condition that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and the game ball enters a V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a big hit state is obtained.

  Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6 (a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 6 (b) is a plan view schematically showing a configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150, and FIG. 9 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180.

  The accessory device 150 is roughly composed of an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 7, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically divided by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed.

  A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. Note that the variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

  On the left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161, a pair of opening / closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided. A passage forming member 171 and a driving unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening / closing accessory driving units 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back surface of the driving unit fixing plate 172. Yes. One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening / closing member driving unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening / closing member 168. It is connected. Accordingly, the opening / closing combination 168 is opened by driving the opening / closing combination driving unit 173.

  The opening operation will be described in detail. Each opening / closing member 168 rises upward when the opening / closing member driving unit 173 is not driven (excited), and the respective leading ends thereof are close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening / closing role driving unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening / closing role 168 opens outward, and a game ball is provided between the front end of each opening / closing role 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. A gap larger than one is created. With this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each opening / closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is opened. Note that, even when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening / closing accessory 168 stands up), the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). As long as it is more difficult to enter the accessory device 150 than when the opening / closing accessory 168 is open to the outside, it is useful when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited). The structure which can be entered into the object apparatus 150 may be sufficient. For example, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is A configuration in which the gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

  Further, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by the cover member 174. Yes.

  A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. An extension wall 175a formed on the upper portion of the front frame 175 extends above the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the front of the game ball that has reached the ball receiving plate 163 by the extension wall 175a. Jumping out of is regulated.

  A passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163 is formed in the passage forming member 171, and a game ball passage 178 extending in the up-down direction is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (FIG. 6 (b)). Since the passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178 and further has a width narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving plate 163 is a game ball. Guided to passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. Thereby, the entrance of the game ball to the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is configured by a known proximity sensor.

  A rotary unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be positioned below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 8, the rotating body unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

  The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 that is recessed downward in the approximate center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical, and is inclined so as to become lower as it goes from the center on the back side toward the center on the near side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center on the back side of the guide passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. The passage wall 183a that forms the back center of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage wall 183a, and a passage cover 184 that extends in the horizontal direction is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. . However, the passage cover 184 is formed with an inlet opening 184a, and in a plan view (see FIG. 9), the rear side portion of the guide passage 183 has a configuration in which only the rear center is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184 a overlaps the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the back center of the guide passage 183.

  A ball sorting portion 185 is formed in the center on the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball distribution unit 185 has an inclined surface 185a that is inclined downward from the right side to the left side. The game ball that has reached the ball distribution unit 185 is guided to the left guide passage 183 along the inclination of the inclined surface 185a. Then, it rolls along the inclination of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the front side of the guide passage 183. On the front side of the guide passage 183, a lead-out portion 186 that is inclined toward the concave portion 182 is formed.

  The concave portion 182 has a V winning opening 182a formed on the bottom surface thereof. The V winning opening 182a communicates with the V winning path 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a. In this case, a V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning path 191a, and a game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

  In addition, a release port 182 b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The release port 182b communicates with a release passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the release port 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the release passage 191b. In this case, a detachment sensor 193 is provided in the detachment passage 191b, and a game ball passing through the detachment passage 191b is detected by the detachment sensor 193. The V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193 are configured by well-known proximity sensors. The game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a and the detaching path 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge path (not shown).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the accessory device 150 is not provided with a discharge path other than the route passing through the V winning path 191a or the detaching path 191b, and the game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 is an accessory. When discharged to the outside of the device 150, it always passes through either the V winning path 191a or the losing path 191b.

  A rotating body drive unit 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from the lower side, and an output shaft 194 a extending in the vertical direction of the rotating body drive unit 194 includes a discharge passage forming member 191 and a guide passage forming member 181. It penetrates. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. The rotating body drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

  The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the concave portion 182 of the guide passage forming member 181, and is located in the concave portion 182. The rotating body 201 rotates clockwise as the rotating body driving unit 194 is driven. Ten spherical guide portions 202 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, and these spherical guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Among these, nine ball guides 202 are bottomed exit guides 203, and one ball guide 202 is a bottomless V prize opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to become lower as it goes outward. Each ball guide unit 202 has a size that allows one game ball to enter, and a game ball led out from the lead-out unit 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide units 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls into the V winning passage 191a from the V winning opening 182a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b from the outlet 182b.

  In the present embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to grasp the rotational position of the rotating body 201. The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other at a predetermined interval. One arm portion 196a is provided with a light emitting element, and the light emitting element in the other arm portion 196b is connected to the light emitting element. A light receiving element is disposed at the opposite position. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on the sensor substrate 197, and the sensor substrate 197 is driven between the arms 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that the cut van 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

  The cut van 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates as the output shaft 194a rotates. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Accordingly, light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut van 198, and only from the light emitting element when the cutout part 198a passes between both arm parts 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates. Light reaches the light receiving element. Then, by forming the notch 198a corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, it is monitored whether or not the light receiving element has detected light from the light emitting element. The rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes the front side of the derivation portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided in the left and right guide passage 183 on the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the side where the release port 182b is formed. . The first distribution member 300 is disposed as a bottom portion constituting a part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183 above the release passage 191b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid). When the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled, one of the floor portions of the guide passage 183 is provided. The state is switched between an undistributed state that constitutes a portion and a distributed state that rotates downward with the rear end of the first distributing member 300 as a rotation axis and is inclined downward toward the detachment passage 191b.

  With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not driven (is not in an excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, the guide passage 183 is leftward. The distributed game balls pass through the first sorting member 300 using the first sorting member 300 as a floor, and reach one of the ball guides 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (becomes an excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower release passage 191b. Then, the game ball passing over the first sorting member 300 does not reach the rotating body 201 and is directly guided to the detaching passage 191b. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) varies depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 210 is provided for directly guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning award passage 191a. The warp passage 210 includes a substantially cylindrical passage cover 211 and a passage formation portion 212 that divides the internal space of the passage cover 211 into a passage shape to form a spherical passage. The passage cover 211 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency (translucency), and a spiral passage 213 is formed inside the passage cover 211 by the inner peripheral wall surface of the passage cover 211 and the passage formation portion 212. . One game ball can pass through the spiral passage 213.

  An entrance guide 215 for guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the spiral passage 213 is provided on the upper portion of the passage cover 211. The entrance guide portion 215 is disposed corresponding to a portion of the passage wall 183 a of the guide passage 183 that is behind the ball sorting portion 185. Specifically, an opening (not shown) that is opened rearward is formed in a portion of the passage wall 183a that is behind the ball distributing portion 185, and the opening guide portion 215 is formed in the opening. The entrance is in communication. The outlet portion of the inlet guide portion 215 communicates with the spiral passage 213 through the warp inlet portion 214, and the floor surface of the inlet guide portion 215 is inclined downward toward the spiral passage 213.

  A warp outlet 216 for discharging the game ball that has passed through the spiral passage 213 to the outside of the passage cover 211 is formed in the lower portion of the passage cover 211. In front of the warp outlet part 216, an outlet guide part 217 is provided which extends in a downwardly inclined manner toward the front and guides the game ball discharged from the warp outlet part 216 to the discharge passage forming member 191. ing. The discharge passage forming member 191 is formed with a V guide passage 260 that guides a game ball toward the V winning passage 191a, and an outlet portion of the outlet guide portion 217 is formed at the rear end portion 261 of the V guide passage 260. Are communicating. The V guide path 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V prize path 191a, and the front end 262 of the V guide path 260 communicates with the V prize path 191a. Each of the warp inlet 214, the inlet guide 215, the warp outlet 216, the outlet guide 217, and the V guide passage 260 is configured to allow one game ball to pass therethrough.

  With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is guided to the warp passage 210 side, it passes through the spiral passage 213 in the warp passage 210 and is led to the V guide passage 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V guide path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

  Here, in front of the entrance guide portion 215 in the warp passage 210, the game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 are placed on the side of the entrance guide portion 215 (warp passage 210) and the ball sorting portion 185 (left guide passage 183). A second distribution member 310 that can be distributed to either side is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive unit 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven to be controlled in front of the entrance guide unit 215. The state is switched between a non-distributed state that is arranged and a distributed state that is disposed above and not disposed in front of the entrance guide portion 215.

  Further, a shutter 221 that switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the warp inlet 214 is provided at a midway position of the inlet guide 215 between the second distribution member 310 and the warp inlet 214 of the warp passage 210. Is provided. The shutter 221 is connected to a shutter drive unit 221a (electromagnetic solenoid). When the shutter drive unit 221a is driven and controlled, the shutter 221 is disposed in front of the entrance guide unit 215 and is connected to the warp entrance unit 214. A closed state that restricts the inflow of game balls into the warp (closes the warp inlet 214), and allows the game balls to flow into the warp inlet 214 that is disposed above (close the warp inlet 214) Switch to the open state.

  With the above configuration, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not in an excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in an undistributed state, the game ball is in the entrance guide unit 215. After being distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side, the vehicle goes down the left guide passage 183. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven (becomes an excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the entrance guide unit 215, and the Sorted to the guide unit 215 side.

  At this time, when the shutter drive unit 221a is driven (becomes an excited state) and the shutter 221 is in the open state, the game ball on the entrance guide unit 215 passes through the warp entrance unit 214 to form a spiral path. 213 and is led to the V winning path 191a through the exit guide 217 and the V guide path 260. That is, the V prize is directly awarded without being distributed by the rotating body 201. Conversely, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not driven (not excited) and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, the game ball stops by contacting the shutter 221, and the warp inlet 214 The inflow of game balls to is controlled. This state is continued until the shutter 221 is opened, and a game ball is stored in the accessory device 150.

  Here, although both the 2nd distribution member 310 and the rotary body 201 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the 2nd distribution member 310 is arrange | positioned back rather than the rotary body 201, and the front Is lower than the rotary body 201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second sorting member 310 from being aimed at the timing of sorting to the entrance guide portion 215 side. On the other hand, with respect to the rotating body 201, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are distributed, and to increase interest in the rotating body 201 and to improve the presence.

  The ball distribution unit 185 at the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 has a downwardly inclined surface so that the game ball can be distributed not only to the left side but also to the rear side. At this time, the positional relationship with the downward inclined surface is set so that the second distributing member 310 in the non-distributed state is positioned on the front (front) side of the downward inclined surface. Thereby, the occurrence of an event in which the game ball stays in the midway position of the descending inclined surface is suppressed by the second distribution member 310 in the non-distributed state.

  In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball stored at the position in front of the warp inlet 214 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210 (spiral passage 213) is about 2 seconds. The passage length is set in Further, the passage length and the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 are set so that the period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the left guide path 183 and the rotating body 201 is about 3 sec. Is set. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the detaching port 182b is located closer to the derivation unit 186 than the V winning port 182a when viewed in the rotation direction (clockwise) of the rotating body 201. For this reason, the period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the detachment sensor 193 through the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201 (until it is discharged from the accessory device 150 through the detachment sensor 193). ) Is shorter than the period until the V winning sensor 192 is reached via the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201.

  The game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches the ball distribution portion 185 formed at the center in the back of the guide passage 183. Then, the second distribution member 310 is distributed to the left guide passage 183 on condition that the second distribution member 310 is in an undistributed state. Then, it is guided to the derivation unit 186 by rolling on the left guide passage 183. The game ball guided to the derivation unit 186 is guided into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the derivation unit 186. However, the condition that the game ball rolling in the left guide passage 183 can reach the recess 182 is that the first sorting member 300 is in an unsorted state. That is, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recess 182 side or may be led out to the detaching port 182b as it is.

  The rotating body 201 is rotating in the recess 182, and the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the exit guide part 203 is guided to the exit 182 b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the removal sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entered the V winning opening guide 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

  When the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185, if the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, it is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. In the present embodiment, when the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185 in a state where the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the ball is always distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. The shape of the distribution unit 185 is set. When the game balls are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, as already described, the game is performed at the contact position with the shutter 221 (upstream of the warp entrance portion 214). The ball stops and is stored in the accessory device 150 in that state. Thereafter, when the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state, the game ball flows into the spiral passage 213 through the warp inlet 214 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192.

  Of the ten ball guides 202, only one V winning opening guide 204 is provided, so that the game balls that have entered the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 have a 1/10 probability of the V winning opening 182a. Will enter. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71. Further, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

  However, the number of ball guides 202 and the number of V winning opening guides 204 are not limited to those described above. For example, one V winning opening guide 204 is provided for six ball guiding units 202, and 1 It is good also as a structure which wins V with the probability of / 6, and it is good also as a structure which wins V with the other probability.

  The sensors 179, 192, 193, and 196 in the above-mentioned accessory device 150 and the power lines and signal lines of the driving units 173, 221a, 300a, 310a, and 194 are relayed to the guide passage forming member 181. The terminal board 199 is connected. These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device which will be described later, and the main control device detects entry and drive control of the drive unit. However, it is good also as a structure which performs these part or all on the side of the production | presentation control apparatus mentioned later which is a control apparatus of a sub side.

  In the symbol display device 51, a notification that a game ball has entered one of the operation ports 38, 39 and the accessory device 150 is in an open state, a notification that a game ball has entered the accessory device 150, In addition to the notification during the normal gaming state, such as notification of the distributed result, notification of the distribution status at the rotating body 201, notification of occurrence of the big hit state by detecting the game ball with the V winning sensor 192, etc. The notification of the round effect in the middle and the error notification when abnormality is detected are also performed. Note that the contents of these effects are not limited as long as the player can clearly grasp each game situation.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 24 is provided with a vibration detection sensor 240 and a magnet detection sensor 241 as abnormality detection means. The vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241 are installed around the accessory device 150. These detection sensors 240 and 241 are electrically connected to the main controller 81 and detect vibrations and magnets (magnetism) in a situation where operating power (operating voltage) is supplied from the main controller 81, and The detection result is output to the main controller 81.

  As described above, since the prize device 150 is assigned to the V prize, the game ball flow is changed by applying vibration to the accessory device 150 or attracting the game ball by a magnet. It is assumed that an illegal act is attempted to guide the ball to the V prize opening guide unit 204. On the other hand, since the detection sensors 240 and 241 are provided, it is possible to grasp the fraudulent act when the fraud is performed.

  The positions of the detection sensors 240 and 241 are arbitrary as long as vibrations and magnetism can be detected. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing an illegal act on the accessory device 150, it is preferable that the accessory device 150 is disposed closer to the accessory device 150.

  The main control device 81 to which the detection sensors 240 and 241 are connected has a game stop function for stopping subsequent games when vibrations or magnets are detected by the detection sensors 240 and 241.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 is housed and configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The payout mechanism 92 is provided with a back pack substrate 92a (see FIG. 5). The backpack substrate 92a is supplied with, for example, a main power of 24 volts AC, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 92b.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. When changing state such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signal output (or during the transition to the state). And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus by the side of a game hall through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 60 is performed. The power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a RAM erase switch 98a (see FIG. 5). This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off by operating only the power switch 92b as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the shutdown is stored, but the power switch 92b is operated while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a. When the power is turned on, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power source and a discharge control. A device 98 is mounted.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that manages the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 81 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its release to a board box that houses the main control board 111 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 115 is connected to a power source having a function of supplying operating power and the launch control device 98, and the MPU 112 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include a general prize opening as a prize detection sensor for detecting a prize at the other winning parts in addition to the first action sensor 38a and the second action sensor 39c for detecting a prize at both the action holes 38 and 39. A sensor 35a for detecting a prize for 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a prize for the through gate 41, and the like are provided. In addition, as various sensors, an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a removal sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150 are included. In the MPU 112, a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion is performed based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, and the position of the rotating body 201 is determined. To grasp. Further, in the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 38 or the second working port 39. Further, the various sensors include a vibration detection sensor 240 that detects vibration and a magnet detection sensor 241 that detects a magnet. The MPU 112 performs abnormality monitoring based on the detection results of these detection sensors 240 and 241.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, a power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion.

  Various effects commands are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various driving units, an electric accessory driving unit 39b, an opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, a first distribution driving unit 300a, a second distribution driving unit 310a, a shutter driving unit 221a, a rotation A body drive unit 194 and the like are connected. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a winning occurs in any of the operation ports 38 and 39 or when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode based on winning in the V winning sensor 192, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under the control, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 168 is executed. In these cases, the drive control of both the distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, and the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 194 is performed.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery based on winning at both the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 39a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power source and launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source and launch control device 98. The power failure monitoring board 115 determines that a power failure (power cutoff) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 98 is less than 22 volts, and sends a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable) provided in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81. Output to the interrupt pin). Thus, main controller 81 recognizes the occurrence of a power failure and immediately executes the NMI interrupt processing, and further executes the power failure processing based on this. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

  The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid so that the game ball is Fired.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board 141 on which an MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 142 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 142 drives and controls the various light emitting units 54 to 56 and 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 81. In addition, a command obtained as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into a chip. It has.

  The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 155).

  The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 152, and volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 155 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

  The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 43, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 51, setting the display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated and the jackpot used when determining the jackpot type such as whether to open / close the opening / closing accessory 168 or the like. An opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the opening state when the opening and closing accessory 168 is set to the opening state based on the winning of the type counter C2 and the operating ports 38 and 39; The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each counter C1, C2, CINI, CS, C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the opening type counter CS is acquired information when a winning to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

  The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE composed of a first result display area reserved area Ra and a second result display area reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is selected in accordance with a winning history to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the release type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored as hold information in any area. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39 are each stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area stores the number of winning histories stored in the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. The information for specifying is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and at the start of one game round, the execution area AE Based on the various pieces of numerical information stored in the table, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (ie 99), it returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in the result table storage area 113a as the success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the result table, as a game result, a disengagement result, a direct hit result, and a normal release result are set. The normal release result is a game result that causes the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 to be in an open state (opening / closing execution mode) based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39. In the present embodiment, when the winning to the first operating port 38 occurs, the opening / closing role 168 is opened once, and when the winning for the second operating port 39 occurs, the opening / closing role 168 is opened twice. It is set to become. The disengagement result is a result that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not in the open state even when a prize is generated in the operation ports 38 and 39. In this case, it is not possible to make a prize for the accessory device 150, and the transition to the big hit state (opening / closing execution mode) cannot be expected. The direct hit result is a result of shifting to the big win state (opening / closing execution mode) only when a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39, and of course, even if a winning to the accessory device 150 does not occur. As described above, the jackpot state is entered.

  In the following, in order to distinguish between the opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result and the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result (including both the result based on the direct hit and the occurrence of the V prize), the former is used. Is sometimes referred to as a “first opening / closing execution mode”, and the latter is sometimes referred to as a “second opening / closing execution mode”.

  Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in losing is one, the number of random number values that result in direct hits is one, and the rest are normal open results. Corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of opening / closing members 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winnings of both the operating ports 38 and 39, and 1/100. Although the opening / closing role 168 is not opened with the probability of, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and the opening / closing role 168 is not opened with the probability of 1/100, and the opening / closing execution mode is entered. There is no migration.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the direct hit result and the loss result are not provided. However, since these results are included, the game can be diversified. Especially, when a direct hit result is provided, a game in which winnings to the accessory device 150 do not frequently occur due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a stand, it can be expected to generate a big hit state, and even with such a game stand, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the willingness to play.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for setting the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in various table storage areas 113d as the success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate variation mode are set as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate variation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game varies in a round game.

  Here, the round game means (1) that the opening / closing member 168 is opened for a predetermined upper limit number of times (in other words, the total opening time reaches a predetermined upper limit opening time). (2) A game that continues until one of the predetermined number of game balls in the accessory device 150 reaches a predetermined upper limit. By the way, in this embodiment, the opening / closing role 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to nine.

  The maximum number of round games to be played in each jackpot type is determined in advance. Specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that a game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game, and that the game ball wins V.

  For example, the open type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. The open type counter CS is periodically updated. However, the update timing is set to be different from the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an illegal act of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method. The updated release type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39, like the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  A random number value for setting a waiting time (opening timing) from winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 to opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as waiting information group storage means in the ROM 113. It is stored as (waiting period information group).

  Here, the contents of the release timing table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12C, a plurality of types of waiting times (waiting periods) from the winning timing (or the closing timing of the previous opening / closing accessory 168) to the operation ports 38 and 39 are set as the opening timing. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby time are set in increments of 0.1 sec from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec. The interval between these times (0.1 sec) is set to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle). The act of intentionally changing (raising) the probability is less likely to be performed.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory reservation area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 41.

  Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to differ regardless of the gaming state. That is, it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or when the win time and the number of open times are large (so-called high frequency support mode), or when the win probability in the open lottery is lower or wins There is no mode such as a state where the time and the number of times of opening are small (so-called low frequency support mode). With these configurations, it is possible to improve the interest because the range of increase and decrease in the number of balls can be increased. On the other hand, in order to adjust the number of balls in the high frequency support mode, There may also be a situation where it is necessary to take specifications such as setting the winning frequency for both the operation ports 38 and 39 to be low. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 is unlikely to occur, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play can be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to expect a prize to the operating ports 38 and 39 to some extent even in the normal gaming state, It is possible to avoid a decrease in the willingness to play.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing and a normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and an NMI that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
First, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. . In the NMI interrupt processing, a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S100, and this processing is terminated. Thereafter, when it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal processing described later, the power failure processing is executed. This process will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 112 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In subsequent step S102, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In a succeeding step S103, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (game stop state). Whether or not the game is stopped is determined to be the game stopped state on condition that the game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is determined that the game is stopped, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not stopped, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed in step S104. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, 240, and 241 are read, the state of the various detection sensors is determined, and the processing for saving the detection information is executed. To do. Further, when a winning of a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of a prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 has detected winning in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is set.

  In the subsequent step S105, a through winning process is performed in conjunction with winning through the through gate 41. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 41 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S102 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 114c. Moreover, the process for lighting the 3rd holding | maintenance light emission part 56 corresponding to the effect holding | maintenance memory | storage number is performed with respect to the production control apparatus 82.

  In a succeeding step S106, a winning process for the operation port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won any of the operating ports 38 and 39. If it is determined that a prize is won, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a. Details of the winning process for the operation opening will be described later.

  Thereafter, the abnormality monitoring process is executed in step S107, and then the timer interruption process is terminated. In the abnormality monitoring process, the presence or absence of vibration detection or magnet detection is determined with reference to the detection results of the vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241, or the presence or absence of residual sphere abnormality in the accessory device 150 is determined. Details of the abnormality monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the winning process for the operation port in step S106 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In step S <b> 201, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the first operating port 38 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first working port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set. In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first working port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). In a succeeding step S205, a process of setting the number of times of opening / closing accessory 168 to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “1” to the number-of-releases counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 is executed. Thereafter, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operation port 38, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operation port 39 (starting winning). It is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second operation port 39, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set in step S208. In the subsequent step S209, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second operation port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). In the subsequent step S211, processing for setting the number of times of opening / closing accessory 168 to two is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “2” in the above-mentioned opening number counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the processing of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening / closing accessory 168 will not be in the open state depending on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 as described above. Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S206, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, if a game ball has not won any of the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process in step S603 in the normal process (see FIG. 19) described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). judge. If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the corresponding start display storage number N of the corresponding result display area holding area is set in step S302. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total pending count storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as common pending count CRN) is incremented by 1.

  In the subsequent step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S102 and the open type counter CS updated in the normal process described later is used in the corresponding result display area reserved area. The first storage area among the storage area areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  That is, when the start reserved memory number RaN for the first working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Ra for the first working port. Is stored in the first storage area, that is, the reserved area Ra corresponding to the start reserved memory number RaN for the first working port incremented by 1 in step S302.

  Further, when the start holding storage number RbN for the second working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Rb for the second working port. In the first storage area, that is, the reserved area Rb corresponding to the start reserved memory number RbN for the second working port incremented by 1 in step S302. After the process of step S304 is executed, the information acquisition process is terminated.

  Next, the abnormality monitoring process in step S107 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 240. If vibration is detected, the vibration detection flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S402. In subsequent step S403, the vibration detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. The vibration detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the MPU 112 has specified detection of vibration. The vibration detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In subsequent step S404, an external output process for abnormality is executed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the detection of vibration has been specified.

  If vibration is not detected in step S401, or after executing the external output process for abnormality in step S404, it is determined in step S405 whether or not a magnet is detected by the magnet detection sensor 241. If a magnet is detected, the magnet detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S406, and the magnet detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S407. To do. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of the magnet. The magnet detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In subsequent step S408, an abnormal external output process is executed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the detection of the magnet has been specified.

  If no magnet is detected in step S405, or after executing the abnormal external output process in step S408, whether or not the remaining sphere flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S409. Determine whether. The remaining ball flag indicates that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the presence of the game ball is confirmed even though the game ball should not exist in the accessory device 150. It is stored when it is done. If the remaining sphere flag is not stored, the abnormality monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball flag is stored, the remaining detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S410. The remaining detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of the remaining sphere. The remaining detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In subsequent step S411, an abnormality external output process is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the detection of the remaining ball has been specified, and the abnormality monitoring process is terminated.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S501, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (the payout control device 97 or the like) to become operable, a wait process is executed for about 1 second, for example. In the subsequent step S502, access to the RAM 114 is permitted.

  Thereafter, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 98a provided in the power source and launch control device 98 is turned on. In the subsequent step S504, whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether or not. If the power failure flag is stored, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S505, and in the subsequent step S506, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, stored and held. Determine the validity of the data. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 114, for example. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 are correctly stored.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed (YES in step S503), the process proceeds to steps S507 to S509. Further, when the power failure flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 and the occurrence information of the power shut-off is not set (the result of step S504 is NO), or depending on the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) Also when the abnormality of the stored data is confirmed (the result of step S506 is NO), the process proceeds to steps S507 to S509.

  In step S507, an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97). In subsequent step S508, the used area of the RAM 114 is cleared to 0, and in step S509, initialization processing of the RAM 114 is executed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S516, and the routine proceeds to normal processing to be described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 98a has not been pressed, the various types of RAM 114 are stored in step S510 on condition that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. The power failure flag stored in the flag storage area 114e is cleared. In subsequent step S511, a power recovery command for returning the sub-side control device (payout control device 97 or the like) to the gaming state before power-off is output.

  In subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not an abnormality detection flag (vibration detection flag, magnet detection flag, remaining ball flag) is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of RAM 114. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is cleared in step S513, and the abnormality detection state is released.

  If the abnormality detection flag is not stored in step S512, or after the abnormality detection state is canceled in step S513, whether or not the game stop state is set based on the game stop flag in the RAM 114 in step S514. Determine.

  When the game stop state is set, in step S515, the game stop flag in the RAM 114 is cleared and the game stop state is released. Specifically, the launch stop process for prohibiting the launch of the game ball, the payout stop process for stopping the payout of the game ball by the payout device 96, and the like are canceled. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S516, and the routine proceeds to normal processing to be described later. Thereby, it returns to the state before power-off. At this time, if the vibration, the magnet, the remaining ball are detected and the game stop state is set before the power is cut off, the state returns to the released state.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing from step S601 to step S610 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S612 and S613 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal process, first, a game stop determination process is executed in step S601. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the situation is to stop the progress of the game, the game stop process is executed. Details of the game stop process will be described later.

  In subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is in a stopped state, and the processing in steps S603 to S609 is executed on condition that the game is not stopped. In step S603, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when an effect command, vibration detection command, magnet detection command, and remaining detection command are set, the command is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S604, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In subsequent step S605, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In the game control process, drive control (first opening / closing execution mode) of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed. After executing the game control process of step S605, the process proceeds to step S606, and the game state transition process is executed. With this gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the second opening / closing execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S605 and the game state transition process in step S606 will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S607, a remaining ball determination process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is executed. In the remaining ball determination process, it is determined whether or not the game ball won in the accessory device 150 in accordance with the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is not properly discharged and remains in the accessory device 150. . Details of the remaining sphere determination process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S607, in step S608, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric charge 39a provided in the second working port 39 is executed. In the electric role support process, the electric role release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114. In addition, when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electrically-powered article 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S609, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the game is stopped, or after the game ball launch control process in step S609 is executed, whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S610. Determine.

  If the power failure flag is not stored, whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached in step S611, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Determine whether. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S612 and S613). That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S612, and the open type counter CS is updated in step S613.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S601 to step S609 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The open type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the power failure flag is stored, the power supply is shut off due to the power failure, and therefore the power failure processing after step S614 is executed. That is, in step S614, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited, and then, in step S615, a power failure command indicating that the power has been shut off is output to the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97).

  In step S616, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and after the access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S617, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Even after the power supply is completely shut down, the power stored in the RAM 114 (power at the time of power interruption) is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 98, so the information stored in the RAM 114 before the power cut-off is It is held as it is within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days).

<Game stop determination process>
Next, the game stop determination process of step S601 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game stop determination process, it is determined in steps S701 to S703 whether a vibration detection flag, a magnet detection flag, or a remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Thereby, it is determined whether or not it is in a state where vibration has been detected, whether or not it is in a state where magnets have been detected, and whether or not the presence of a remaining sphere has been specified. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the game stop determination process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, a closing control process for displacing the electric accessory 39a and the accessory device 150 (the opening / closing accessory 168) to the closed state is executed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 39a or the accessory device 150 is open, it is forcibly closed.

  In the subsequent step S705, a launch stop process for prohibiting the launch of the game ball by switching the launch permission signal to the power source and launch control device 98 to the LOW level is executed, and in step S706, other release processes are executed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 97, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 96 is stopped. In addition, a game stop command is output to the effect control device 82 to stop the effect display and the like on the symbol display device 51. After execution of step S706, a game stop flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 and a game stop state is set in step S707. Thereafter, the game stop determination process ends.

  By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, affirmative determination is made in both step S103 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed thereafter and step S602 of the normal process (FIG. 19). Will be. And when affirmation determination is carried out in those steps, the process of step S104-step S107 and the process of step S604-step S609 are skipped. These processes are processes for advancing the game substantially, and the progress of the game can be stopped by skipping such a process.

Incidentally, the process of updating various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 is continued without being skipped even in the game stop state (steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 14 and step S612 in FIG. 19). , S613). Thereby, even if it is in a game stop state, the update of the counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 for various lotteries can be continued. In this configuration, even if the RAM erase switch 98a is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, the various counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 are not initialized, and the game is stopped. It is more effective when applied to a configuration that does not require initialization of the RAM 114 when the state is released.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process of step S605 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game control process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on occurrence of direct hit result or V winning) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The second opening / closing execution mode flag indicates that the second opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the second opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later. It is erased when the second opening / closing execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

  When in the second opening / closing execution mode, the process after step S802, that is, the game start process in steps S803 to S806, the game progress process in steps S808 to S810, and the game end process in steps S811 to S813 The game control process is terminated without executing any of the above. In other words, when the second opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game starts (the role triggered by the winning of the operating ports 38, 38 regardless of whether the operating ports 38, 39 have been won or not). The material device 150 is not opened).

  If it is not in the second opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S802 whether the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The first opening / closing execution mode flag indicates that the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the game result based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 is the release result (in this embodiment, the normal opening result) ) And is erased when the operation of the accessory device 150 based on the result (including the waiting period after closing) ends.

  If it is not in the first opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to the game start process in steps S803 to S806. In the game start process, first, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, in order to set the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb in step S804 for the lottery process. In step S805, whether or not to determine the game result of the data set in the data setting process is executed. Thereafter, a control start process for starting the control of the accessory device 150 is executed in step S806, and then the game control process is ended.

  Here, the data setting process in step S804, the success / failure determination process in step S805, and the control start process in step S806 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S902 to S907 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S908 to S913.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is set for lottery processing regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the second result display area corresponding to the second operation port 39 is used. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S902, the first start hold memory number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S903, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S904, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S905, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S906, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display portion flag specifies whether the current determination result corresponds to the hold information of the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb. Information.

  In the subsequent step S907, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the first operating port 38. A shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S907 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the first hold light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number is executed.

  In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S908, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display portion hold area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S909, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S910, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S911 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S912, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S913, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the presentation control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the second operating port 39. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S913 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the second hold light emitting unit 55 in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number is executed.

  Next, the success / failure determination processing in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1101, with reference to the data shifted to the current execution area AE (big hit random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S1102, and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. The V winning flag originally indicates that the passing of the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192. Here, the V winning flag functions as a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the second release execution mode. To do.

  In the subsequent step S1103, the direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S1103, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the direct hit is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The direct hit command set in step S1103 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

  If it is not a direct hit result in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, with reference to the data shifted to the current execution area AE (big hit random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the current game result is an outlier result. If the result is a disengagement result, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value set in the number-of-opens counter in step S205 or step S211 in the above-described winning operation for the operation opening (FIG. 15) is cleared to “0”.

  In step S 1106, the detach command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S1106, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the result of detachment is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The off command set in step S1106 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 is not in an open state based on the received detachment command.

  If it is not an outlier result in step S1104, it means that the current determination result is a normal release result. In this case, a normal release command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S1107. In step S1107, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the normal release result is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The normal release command set in step S1107 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in an open state based on the received normal release command. In other words, in the present embodiment, the result of the determination of success / failure (game result) is immediately notified on the basis of winning in the operation ports 38 and 39.

  Next, the control start process in step S806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the control start process, first, in step S1201, referring to the opening number counter in the RAM 114, a process for grasping the opening number of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed. In subsequent step S1202, an opening / closing timing setting process is executed. In the opening / closing timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 22), data related to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113. , And the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set. Specifically, from this process, a numerical value corresponding to how many seconds later the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (whether to start driving control of the opening / closing agent driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table, and the RAM 114 The data is input to a standby counter provided in the various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168.

  In subsequent step S1203, a first distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 (see FIG. 8) is executed. In the first distribution setting process of step S1203, the first distribution member 300 is maintained in a non-distributed state (a state where the game balls are not distributed to the side of the outlet 182b) during execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. The operation mode is set. In other words, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have won the accessory device 150 and are guided to the left guide passage 183 by the ball distribution unit 185 when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed reach the rotating body 201. Will be. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 with the first sorting member 300 in the sorting state in a part of the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode is the rotating body 201. It is good also as a structure which provides the opportunity guide | induced to the removal port 182b, without reaching.

  Next, in step S1204, a second distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 (see FIG. 8) is executed, and in step S1205, the shutter 221 (see FIG. 8) is executed. The shutter setting process for setting the operation mode is performed. In the second distribution setting process in step S1204, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in a non-distributed state (a state where the game balls are not distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side) during execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. Next, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set. Further, in the shutter setting process in step S1205, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 maintains a closed state (a state where the warp inlet 214 is closed) during execution of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the route passing through the warp passage 210 is cut off, and the lottery for whether or not to win a V prize is exclusively received by the rotating body 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the route passing through the warp passage 210 is released during a part of the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode (the second distribution member 310 is set in the distribution state and the shutter 221 is set). The game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 may be guided to the V prize opening 182a without passing through the rotating body 201.

  After execution of step S1205, a rotating body setting process for setting the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is executed in step S1206. In the setting process for the rotating body in step S1206, setting for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (position where the V winning opening guide unit 204 faces the derivation unit 186), or after returning to the initial position, the rotating body 201 The rotation start timing for starting the rotation, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 that has started the rotation, and the like are set. In the present embodiment, the rotator 201 starts to rotate from the initial position at a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed since winning the operating ports 38 and 39 that triggered the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. Then, the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so that the rotation that rotates once in about 5 seconds is continuously repeated at least until the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. After execution of step S1206, the control start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game control process of FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S802 that the first opening / closing execution mode is being performed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the end standby time has elapsed. The end standby time is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is ended. The end standby time setting process will be described later.

  If the waiting time at the end has not elapsed, the game progression process of steps S808 to S810 is executed. In the game progress processing, in-control processing is executed in step S808, in-game operation part processing is executed in step S809, winning processing is executed in subsequent step S810, and the game control processing is terminated. To do.

  First, the in-control processing in step S808 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this determination, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the opening timing by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S1202. If it is the opening timing in step S1301, the opening control process is executed in step S1302. In this process, the opening / closing combination driving unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing combination 168 to the open state. Further, in step S1302, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 0.5 sec in the present embodiment) to the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The opening period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168.

  In subsequent step S1303, a process of subtracting “1” from the number of times of opening of the RAM 114 is executed. In a succeeding step S1304, it is determined whether or not it is the first opening in the first opening / closing execution mode with reference to the opening number counter of the RAM 114. If it is the first release, the first opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1305, and then this in-control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that it is not the first release, that is, if it is the second release in the second release, the process during this control is terminated as it is.

  If it is not the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S 1306, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this process, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the closing timing by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S1302. If it is the closing timing in step S1306, a closing control process is executed in step S1307. In this process, the opening / closing combination 168 is displaced to the closed state by ending the drive control of the opening / closing combination driving unit 173.

  In a succeeding step S1308, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of opening is “0” with reference to the number of times of opening of the RAM 114. If it is “0”, in step S 1309, a process for setting the end standby time is executed.

  As described above, the end standby time is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is ended. The waiting time is set in consideration of a period until a game ball won in the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150. In the present embodiment, when the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201, it is set to about 3 sec. The time is set to a predetermined period longer than this (uniformly 3.5 sec in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even when a game ball wins just before the accessory device 150 is closed, it is possible to expect a big hit based on the V winning.

  In step S1309, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end standby time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Since the waiting time counter at the end is updated (decremented) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the waiting time counter at the end reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”). It becomes possible to grasp that the standby time has elapsed.

  If the number of times of opening is not “0” in step S1308, that is, if the second opening in the second opening remains, a waiting time (closing) until the second opening is executed in step S1310. Time) setting process. In the process of step S1310, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current standby time (1 sec uniformly in this embodiment) to the standby time counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

  If it is not the closing timing in step S1306, after executing the process of step S1309 or after executing the process of step S1310, the in-control process is terminated.

  Next, the in-object operation unit process of step S809 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 or not. If it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distributed state to the undistributed state Displace. Further, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or after executing the process of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second sorting member 310. If it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distributed state to the undistributed state. Displace. In addition, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, both the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set to be kept in the non-distributed state (FIG. 24). In Steps S1203 and S1204), the determinations in Steps S1401 and S1403 in the first opening / closing execution mode are always negative, and the processes in Steps S1402 and S1404 are not executed.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the second sorting member 310 in step S1403, or after executing the process of step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the shutter 221 or not. If it is the displacement timing, a shutter control process is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and when it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. In addition, when the shutter driving unit 221a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the open state.

  Since the shutter 221 is also set to be kept closed in the first opening / closing execution mode (step S1205 in FIG. 24), the determination in step S1405 in the first opening / closing execution mode is always negative. Therefore, the process of step S1406 is not executed.

  After execution of step S1406, a rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotating body drive unit 194 is controlled so as to drive and control the rotating body 201 in accordance with the setting contents already described (step S1206 in FIG. 24). After the execution of step S1407, the process for the in-acting part operation unit is terminated.

  Next, the winning process of step S810 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1501, the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the accessory device 150. If a prize has been won, in step S1502, an in-item prize command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. The prize winning command set in step S1502 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received prize winning command, a notification that a winning to the bonus device 150 has occurred (notification for paying attention to the operation of the game ball in the bonus device 150) is performed. Execute the process for

  In subsequent step S1503, a process of incrementing the remaining sphere counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by 1 is executed. This remaining ball counter RPC is for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of game balls present in the accessory device 150.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that a prize has not been generated for the accessory device 150, or after the processing of step S1503 has been executed, in step S1504, the V winning sensor 192 causes a game ball to pass (occurrence of a V prize). ) Is detected. If the occurrence of the V prize is detected, the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1505. In subsequent step S1506, a process of decrementing the remaining sphere counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by one is executed. That is, if the occurrence of a V prize is detected in step S1504, in addition to the occurrence of a V prize, the game ball is also discharged from the accessory device 150, so the remaining ball counter RPC is decremented. The number of game balls in the physical device 150 is updated. After the execution of step S1506, the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence of a V prize is not detected in step S1504, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the passing (separation) of the game ball is detected by the detachment sensor 193. If a disconnection is detected, the process proceeds to step S1506, and a process of decrementing the remaining sphere counter RPC by 1 is executed. That is, even when a detachment is detected, it means that the detachment with respect to the game ball is confirmed, and that the game sphere is discharged from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by reducing the remaining sphere counter RPC, the accessory device The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if a miss is not detected in step S1507, that is, if neither a V winning or a miss has been specified, the present winning process is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC.

  Returning to the description of the game control process of FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S807 that the end standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S811, and the game end process in steps S811 to S813 is executed. Note that, in a situation where the end standby time is not set, a negative determination is made in step S807, and the above-described game progress processing in steps S808 to S810 is executed.

  In the game end process, first, in step S811, a process of clearing the first opening / closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. In the subsequent step S812, a control end process is executed. In this process, a process for ending the control (first opening / closing execution mode) of the accessory device 150 with respect to one hold information is performed. More specifically, the presence / absence of an error in each of the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, and 194 is confirmed, and the return process to the initial position is performed.

  Next, in step S813, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the game control process ends. The control end command set in step S813 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is ended based on the received control end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S606 in the normal processing (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the second opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result) is being executed. If it is not in the second opening / closing execution mode, the process advances to step S1602 to determine whether or not the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) is being executed. If the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the first opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the current game result corresponds to the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the V winning flag is stored, the start process of the second opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1604. In the start process, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the second opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the area 114e. In step S1604, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode without opening the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is set. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

  In subsequent step S1605, a type determination process for determining the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the current execution area AE, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is set to 16R continuation mode by referring to the type table in the ROM 113. Or the continuation rate variation mode.

  In the subsequent step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result in step S1605. If it is the 16R continuation mode, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1607. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

  If it is not the 16R continuation mode in step S1606, or after executing the processing of step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, “15” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and “19” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d. . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one second opening / closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 is the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter for counting.

  In the present embodiment, the first opening / closing execution mode when the direct hit or the V winning is generated corresponds to the first round game among the 16 round games, and from the second round and subsequent round games. The second opening / closing execution mode is started. That is, the second round is the first round in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  After the execution of step S1608, the rotating body setting process is executed in step S1609. In the setting process for the rotating body, the setting for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V prize opening guide unit 204 faces the derivation unit 186) or the rotation of the rotating body 201 starts after returning to the initial position. The rotation start timing to be rotated, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 that has started the rotation, and the like are set. In the present embodiment, the rotation from the initial position is started at a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed from the opening start timing, and then the rotation that makes one rotation at about 5 sec is performed at least in the second opening / closing execution mode. The operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so as to be continuously repeated until the end of.

  In the subsequent step S1610, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This opening command includes information on whether the mode is the 16R continuation mode or the continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1611, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the second opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, and the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the opening standby time has elapsed, an opening / closing process is executed in step S1613.

  Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, the opening / closing process is terminated. If it is not “0”, it is determined in step S1702 whether a round game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a round flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The round flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed, is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e at the start of the round game, and is deleted at the end of the round game.

  If it is determined in step S1702 that the round flag is not stored and the game is not in a round game, it is determined in step S1703 whether the value of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is “0”. judge. The processing in this step corresponds to processing for determining whether or not a closing time (waiting time) between round games described later has elapsed.

  When the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the present opening / closing process is terminated, whereas when it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1704 and the setting process for each round is executed.

  Specifically, as for the setting process for each round, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the current opening / closing execution mode is the continuation rate variation mode, a process for grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1802. In this process, it is grasped by referring to the value of the first round counter RC1 how many games the round set in the current round setting process is in the opening / closing execution mode. In step S1803, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

  In the round pattern table, as shown in FIG. 31, an open / close pattern for each round is defined in one second open / close execution mode. A plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing accessory 168 in each round are set, and an opening / closing pattern A, an opening / closing pattern B, an opening / closing pattern C, and an opening / closing pattern D are set.

  A specific opening / closing mode regarding each of the opening / closing patterns A to D is defined by the opening / closing pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113 d of the ROM 113. As shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the opening / closing pattern table stores the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing combination 168 in association with the number of times the opening / closing combination 168 is opened in each round game. The open / close pattern table includes a first game section in the first round (opening from the first to the sixth round), a second game section in the middle stage (opening from the seventh to the thirteenth round), and an end stage (from the 14th to the 19th round). The opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 is defined for each game section after being divided into three game sections (game periods) with the third game section (opening up to the first time).

  For example, in the opening / closing pattern A, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), during the opening of 19 times in one round game, the first to sixth times (RC2 = 19 to 14) belonging to the first game section and the second In the seventh to thirteenth (RC2 = 13-7) release times belonging to the game section, the release period is 1.5 seconds longer than the game ball firing period (0.6 sec), and then the 0.5 second closure is performed. (Also referred to as opening / closing pattern P1). In addition, the 14th to 19th times (RC2 = 6 to 1) belonging to the third game section are opened for 0.5 sec and then closed for 1.5 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern P2). In the case of P1, a winning to the accessory device 150 is relatively likely to occur in relation to the firing period, and in the case of P2, it can occur, but is less likely to occur than A1. In other words, the opening / closing pattern A is such that a game ball can easily win the accessory device 150 in the first game section and the second game section.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the opening / closing pattern B is set such that the second game section becomes the opening / closing pattern P1, and the first game section and the third game section become the opening / closing pattern P2. That is, the opening / closing pattern B is such that a game ball is likely to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the second game section.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the opening / closing pattern C is set so that the first game section becomes the opening / closing pattern P1, and the second game section and the third game section become the opening / closing pattern P2. That is, the opening / closing pattern C is such that a game ball is likely to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the first game section.

  As shown in FIG. 32D, the opening / closing pattern D is set so that the third game section becomes the opening / closing pattern P1, and the first game section and the second game section become the opening / closing pattern P2. That is, the opening / closing pattern D is such that a game ball is likely to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the third game section.

  Based on these, the winning characteristics of each round game will be described. As shown in FIG. 32 (e), the round game of the second round in which the opening / closing pattern A is set includes the first game section and the second game section ( The first to thirteenth opening) is a round game having a winning characteristic A that makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize device 150, and the third to seventh round games in which the opening / closing pattern B is set are In the second game section (seventh to thirteenth opening), a round game having a winning characteristic B in which a game ball is likely to win a bonus device 150 is obtained. In addition, in the 8th to 11th round games in which the opening / closing pattern D is set, the winning characteristics that the game ball can easily win the accessory device 150 in the third game section (14th to 19th opening). The round game of the 12th to 16th rounds in which the opening / closing pattern C is set is a round game having D, and the game ball is placed on the accessory device 150 in the first game section (1st to 6th release). A round game having a winning characteristic C that is easy to win.

  Returning to the description of the setting processing for each round (FIG. 30), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1803, processing for setting a corresponding round pattern (round opening / closing pattern) is executed in step S1804. Specifically, the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is provided with a flag storage area corresponding to each of the patterns A to D. For example, in the case of the opening / closing pattern A, the flag is stored in the corresponding area.

  When the continuation flag is stored in step S1801, or after executing the process of step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, “9” is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game. In this embodiment, when nine game balls win the accessory device 150 in one round game, the round game ends. . In the subsequent step S1806, a process of setting “19” in the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then in step S1807, round flags are stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. After executing step S1807, the setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1704, the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1705.

  Specifically, in each opening setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, it is first determined in step S1901 whether or not a continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process in step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, the second round counter RC2 is grasped, and it is grasped how many times the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is released in one round. Then, in step S1903, the open / close pattern table (FIGS. 32A to 32D) stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and in step S1904, the opening number grasped in step S1902 is determined. Open / close patterns P1 and P2 corresponding to are set.

  In subsequent step S1905, the distribution pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to. Here, the distribution pattern table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As the distribution pattern table, a first distribution pattern table for the first distribution member 300 (FIG. 34A) and a second distribution pattern table for the second distribution member 310 (FIG. 34B). ) And are provided. First, the first distribution pattern table will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the first distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 in association with the number of times of opening / closing member 168 in each round game. As in the case of the opening / closing pattern table (FIG. 32), the first distribution pattern table is the first game section in the early stage (opening from the first to the sixth) and the middle stage (from the seventh to the 13th). The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is divided into three game sections, that is, a second game section of (open) and a third game section of the last stage (14th to 19th release). Is specified.

  In each opening of the first game section (first to sixth) and the third game section (fourteenth to nineteenth), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MA. The movement pattern MA is displaced to the distributed state after the period TM1 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the undistributed state after the period TM2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, The undistributed state is maintained until the opening / closing member 168 is closed.

  In each opening of the second game section (seventh to thirteenth), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MB. The movement pattern MB is displaced to the distributed state after the period TM3 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing member 168, and is displaced to the undistributed state after the period TM4 (0.5 sec), and then The undistributed state is maintained until the opening / closing member 168 is closed.

  That is, in the 2nd game area, the period when the 1st distribution member 300 is set to the distribution state is longer than the 1st game area and the 3rd game area. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left guide passage 183 are easily distributed to the release port 182b by the first distribution member 300 in the second game section, and are difficult to reach the rotating body 201.

  Next, the second distribution pattern table will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the second distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in association with the number of times the opening / closing member 168 is released in each round game. As with the first distribution pattern table, the second distribution pattern table is the first game section in the early stage (opening from the first time to the sixth time) and the middle stage (opening from the seventh time to the 13th time). ) And the third game section of the final game (opening from the 14th to the 19th game), and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 for each game section. It has been specified.

  In each opening of the first game section (first to sixth times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA. The operation pattern SA is displaced to the distributed state after the period TS1 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the undistributed state after the period TS2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, The undistributed state is maintained until the opening / closing member 168 is closed.

  In each release of the second game section (7th to 13th) and the third game section (14th to 19th), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SB. The movement pattern SB is displaced to the distributed state after the period TS3 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing member 168, and is displaced to the undistributed state after the period TS4 (0.3 sec) from the displacement, The undistributed state is maintained until the opening / closing member 168 is closed.

  That is, in the second game section and the third game section, the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is longer than that in the first game section. For this reason, the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side in the first game section, in which the winning ball is won in the second gaming section and the third gaming section, rather than in the first game section. It will be easy.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter 221 is performed so that the shutter 221 is in the closed state (the warp inlet 214 is closed) during the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distributed state. A mode is set. For this reason, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 cannot pass through the warp passage 210 and are stored in the accessory device 150 as they are. Therefore, since the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set as described above, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 have the seventh to thirteenth (second game) Section) and the 14th to 19th (third game section), it is easy to be stored in the accessory device 150.

  Next, the distribution characteristic by the combination of the 1st distribution member 300 and the 2nd distribution member 310 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the first game section (first to sixth opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the second distribution member 310 The operation mode is set to the operation pattern MA. For this reason, the game ball won in the accessory device 150 in the first game section is unlikely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and easily reaches the rotating body 201.

  In the second game section (seventh to thirteenth release), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SB, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MB. . For this reason, the game ball won in the accessory device 150 in the second game section is easily stored in the accessory device 150 and hardly reaches the rotating body 201.

  In the third game section (14th to 19th release), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MA. . For this reason, the game ball won in the accessory device 150 in the third game section is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150, and if it is not stored, it will easily reach the rotating body 201.

  Unlike the case of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 168, the operation modes of the first distributing member 300 and the second distributing member 310 are common in all rounds (from the second round to the 16th round). Yes. That is, the operation mode of each distribution member 300, 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for each opening (FIG. 33), after referring to the distribution pattern table in step S1905, in step S1906, the operation pattern corresponding to the opening number grasped in step S1902 is assigned to each distribution pattern. This is set for the dividing members 300 and 310. Specifically, for the first distribution member 300, a value corresponding to the period TM1 (0.5 sec) is set in the first distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. For the second distribution member 310, a value corresponding to the period TS1 (0.5 sec) is set in the second distribution counter provided in the area 114d. The first distribution counter and the second distribution counter are updated (decremented) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, so that each of these counters has a predetermined value (for example, “0”). ), It becomes possible to grasp the displacement timing of each of the sorting members 300 and 310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the continuation flag is stored, the process advances to step S1907 to set the current round open / close pattern to P1. That is, in the 16R continuous mode, the open / close pattern of the pattern having the longest open time is set in all rounds (RC1) and in all open times (RC2). Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, it is easy to generate the maximum number of winnings in each round. In the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the next round is continued even if V winning is not achieved (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

  In subsequent step S1908, the operation mode (distribution pattern) of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set. As in the case of the first opening / closing execution mode, the distribution pattern in the 16R continuation mode is the entire distribution from the start to the end of each opening (in other words, the entire from the start to the end of the round game). The operation modes are set so that the distribution members 300 and 310 are maintained in the non-distributed state.

  After executing the process of step S1906 or after executing the process of step S1908, the present setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after the opening setting process is executed in step S1705, the opening process is executed in step S1706. Specifically, drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is started, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. In step S1707, an opening command is set, and the opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In this release command, in addition to the information on whether or not it is the 16R continuation mode, how many rounds are open (information of the first round counter RC1), and how many times are open in one round (second) Information of the round counter RC2) and information of the open / close patterns A to D are included. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect for notifying the opening / closing pattern, the winning rate to the accessory device 150, and the like based on the received opening command, and various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. To control.

  If it is determined in step S1702 that a round flag is stored and it is determined that a round game is being played, the process advances to step S1708 to determine whether the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173. If the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened / closed, the opening process is executed in step S1709, and then the opening / closing process ends.

  Here, the opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the releasing process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. The processing of this step is performed by setting the opening time per opening / closing role 168, that is, the opening time set with reference to the opening / closing pattern table (FIG. 32) after the opening time of the opening / closing role 168 is started. This is a process for determining whether or not (upper limit opening time) has been reached.

  If the value of the timer counter T is not “0” and the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168 has not reached the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S2102 to determine whether or not a game ball has won a winning device 150. This is determined by the detection state of the inlet sensor 179. If no winning has occurred, the open / close process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by “1” in step S2103, and then the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by one in step S2104. After execution of step S2104, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If it is not “0” and the maximum number of winnings in one round (upper winning number) has not been reached, the present opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning counter PC is “0” and the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 has reached the maximum winning number of one round, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to “0” is executed to end the current round game.

  If the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S2101, that is, if the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168 has reached the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S2107, and the second round counter RC2 is set. A process of subtracting “1” is executed.

  After execution of step S2106 or step S2107, the closing process is executed in step S2108. In this process, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is terminated, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is brought into a closed state. In a succeeding step S2109, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “0”. If the second round counter RC2 is not “0”, it means that there is a remaining opening in the current round game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2110, and the closing time between each opening (closing period, waiting period) Execute the setting process. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above opening / closing pattern table (FIG. 32), the present closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped and corresponding to that time. A numerical value is input to the timer counter T.

  On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is “0” in step S2109 and there is no remaining release, the process proceeds to step S2111 to execute the process of setting the waiting time at the end. The waiting time at the end is for waiting for the end of the round game after the final opening and closing in the round game is completed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the end of the waiting time at the end is the end of the round game. The end standby time is similar to the end standby time related to the first opening / closing execution mode (step S1309 in FIG. 25), taking into account the period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150. Is set. That is, a predetermined period (uniformly in this embodiment) longer than the period (about 3 sec) until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the V prize sensor 192 through the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201. 3.5 sec). For this reason, at the end of the round game, all the game balls won in the accessory device 150 are discharged from the accessory device 150, except for the game balls stored in the accessory device 150.

  In step S2111, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end standby time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Since the end-time waiting time counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the end-time waiting time counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, “0”). It becomes possible to grasp what has passed.

  In a succeeding step S2112, a shutter setting process for setting the operation mode of the shutter 221 is executed. In this process, the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the opened state after the lapse of the period TT1 (0 sec) from the end timing of the round game, and returns to the closed state at the timing when the period TT2 (0.3 sec) has elapsed from the displacement. Thus, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set. In the present embodiment, since the period TT1 is set to 0 sec, the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state at the end timing of the round game. In addition, except for the maintenance period (period TT2) of the open state, the shutter 221 is set to maintain the closed state during execution of the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In step S2112, a value corresponding to the period TT1 is set in the shutter counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The shutter counter is updated (decremented by 1) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. Therefore, when the shutter counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”), the displacement timing of the shutter 221 is changed. It becomes possible to grasp.

  After execution of step S2110 or step S2112, a close command is set in step S2113, and the opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This closing command includes information on whether each process for closing this time corresponds to the end of one round or each opening / closing operation in one round. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S1708 that the opening / closing combination 168 is not open, that is, the opening / closing combination 168 is closed, the process proceeds to step S1710 and the value of the timer counter T is reached. Is determined to be “0”. The process in this step is a process for determining whether or not the closing time between each opening set in step S2110 (FIG. 35) or the end-time waiting time set in step S2111 has elapsed.

  If the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the present opening / closing process is terminated. If it is “0”, it is determined in step S1711 whether the second round counter RC2 is “0”. If the second round counter RC2 is not “0”, it means that the closing time between the above-mentioned opening has elapsed, and in this case, the processing from step S1705 onward is executed in order to execute the remaining opening in the current round game. Run. On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is “0”, it means that the waiting time at the end has elapsed, in other words, the end timing of the round game, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S1712. Execute the round update process. Thereafter, the opening / closing process is terminated.

  Here, the round update process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the round update process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “1”. The round update process is a process executed at the round end timing. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current round end timing is the last round in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “1” and it corresponds to the end timing of round games other than the final round, the process proceeds to step S2202, and whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether. This process is the same as the process in step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored, that is, if the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the continuous variation mode, whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2203. Determine whether. That is, in step S2203, it is determined whether a continuation condition for the next round game is satisfied. If the V winning flag is stored and the continuation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute processing for clearing the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202 (when the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode) or after execution of the processing of step S2204, the first round counter RC1 is set to “1” in step S2205. Subtract to update the number of rounds. In a succeeding step S2206, a setting process of a closing time (round interval period) between each round is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 sec) is input to the timer counter T. With respect to the closing time between each round set here, the elapsed timing can be grasped by executing the determination processing in step S1703 (FIG. 29) in the normal processing (opening / closing processing) after the next time.

  After execution of step S2206, a round update command is set in step S2207. The set round update command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This round update command includes information such as the closing time between each round set in step S2206, the number of rounds of the next round game (the number of the round game), and the like. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the end of the round game or the start of the next round based on the received round update command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is “1” in the step S2201 (when it is the end timing of the final round), or when the V winning flag is not stored in the step S2203 (the continuation condition is If not established), the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, a process of clearing the value of the first round counter RC1 to “0” is executed to end the second opening / closing execution mode. In the subsequent step S2209, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, a waiting time for ending in the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by “1” every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2210, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This ending command includes information on the waiting time for ending set in step S2209, the type of the second opening / closing execution mode, the number of continuations of the round game, and the like. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  After execution of step S2207 or after execution of step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211, where a process of clearing round flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed, and then this round update process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28), after the opening / closing process of step S1613 is executed, the in-physical operation part process is executed in step S1614. Since the process of this step is the same as the process for the in-compartment operation unit in FIG.

  In the action part operation process for step S <b> 1614, first, in step S <b> 1401, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the first sorting member 300. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the first distribution counter set in step S1906 (FIG. 33). If the first distribution counter is a predetermined value (for example, “0”), that is, if it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402.

  In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distributed state to the undistributed state Displace. Further, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TM2 (0.5 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the first distribution counter.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or after executing the process of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second sorting member 310. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the second distribution counter set in step S1906. If it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distributed state to the undistributed state. Displace. In addition, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TS2 (0.3 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the second distribution counter.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the second sorting member 310 in step S1403, or after executing the process of step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the shutter 221 or not. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the shutter counter set in step S2112 (FIG. 35). If it is the displacement timing, a shutter control process is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and when it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. In addition, when the shutter driving unit 221a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. When the open state is set, a value corresponding to the open state maintaining period TT2 (0.3 sec) is input to the shutter counter.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the shutter 221 in step S1405, or after executing the process of step S1406, the rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotating body drive unit 194 is controlled so as to drive and control the rotating body 201 according to the setting content set in the setting process for rotating body in step S1609 (FIG. 28). After the execution of step S1407, the process for the in-acting part operation unit is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28), after the processing for the in-function part in step S1614 is executed, in step S1615, whether or not there is a V prize or the game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. A process for passing through an accessory for grasping is executed.

  Here, the process of passing through an accessory will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the process of passing through an accessory, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the passing of a game ball (occurrence of V winning) is detected by the V winning sensor 192. If the occurrence of a V winning is detected, the V winning flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2302. In the subsequent step S2303, a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by 1 is executed. That is, if the occurrence of a V prize is detected in step S2303, it means that the game ball has been discharged from the accessory device 150 in addition to the occurrence of the V prize, so the remaining ball counter RPC is decremented. The number of game balls in the physical device 150 is updated. After the execution of step S2303, the process for passing through the main character is ended.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence of a V prize is not detected in step S2301, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the passing (separation) of the game ball is detected by the removal sensor 193. If a disconnection is detected, the process proceeds to step S2303, and a process of decrementing the remaining sphere counter RPC by 1 is executed. That is, even when a detachment is detected, it means that the detachment with respect to the game ball is confirmed, and that the game sphere is discharged from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by reducing the remaining sphere counter RPC, the accessory device The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if a miss is not detected in step S2304, that is, if neither a V winning or a miss has been specified, the in-core passing process is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC. .

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process of step S1615, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, and in step S1617. It is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1618. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the opening / closing execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the sorting members 300 and 310, the shutter 221, and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial positions.

  As the normal gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening / closing mode that makes it easier to win the second operating port 39 than in other states). And a game state in which the type and probability of a game result at the time of winning a prize to the operation ports 38 and 39 changes (for example, the probability that a direct hit result changes), etc. It is good to set it as those game states in the transfer process.

  After the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1618 is completed, the termination process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1619, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the end process of the opening / closing execution mode, the continuation flag used during the opening / closing execution mode is deleted. In step S1619, information indicating that one opening / closing execution mode has ended is externally output by, for example, stopping the jackpot signal output in step S1611. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the start and end of one opening / closing execution mode in the hall computer (management control device) of the game hall.

  Next, the remaining sphere determination process in step S607 in the normal process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the remaining sphere determination process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first opening / closing execution mode is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

  If the first opening / closing execution mode flag is stored and the first opening / closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the end standby time set in step S1309 (FIG. 25) has elapsed. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the end standby time counter is a predetermined value (for example, “0”).

  If the waiting time at the end has not elapsed, the remaining ball determination process ends. If the waiting time at the end has elapsed, the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0” in step S2403. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not “0” and the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 does not match the number of discharges from the accessory device 150, the process proceeds to step S2404, and the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are stored. Stores the remaining sphere flag. The remaining ball flag is a flag indicating that a game ball remains in the accessory device 150. When the remaining ball flag is stored in this way, it is grasped in the abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 17) of step S107 in the timer interrupt process that the game ball remains, and the game stop determination process (step S601) in the normal process. After 20), the game is stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is “0”, it is determined that no gaming ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the present remaining ball determination process is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the first opening / closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2405 to determine whether the second opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

  If the second opening / closing execution mode flag is stored and the second opening / closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2407, and it is determined whether or not the ending has been completed (whether or not the ending waiting time has elapsed). If the ending has ended, that is, if it is the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0” or not. Make a decision. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2405 to S2407, the remaining sphere determination process is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the continuous variation mode. In FIG. 39, the numbers in square brackets indicate the number of times the opening / closing member 168 is released in one round game. For example, [1] in the second round game means the first release in the round game.

  When the second round game (the first round game in the second opening / closing execution mode) is started at the timing t1, the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started (FIGS. 39A and 39B). )). In the second round game, since the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing combination 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern A (see FIG. 31), the opening state of the opening / closing combination 168 is 1.5 seconds from the timing t1 (FIG. 32 ( It is maintained until timing t3 when a) see) elapses. At timing t3, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t4 after 0.5 sec.

  When the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started, the operation mode of the second sorting member 310 is controlled based on the start timing (timing t1) (FIG. 39 (d)). In the first to sixth opening (first game section), the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA (see FIG. 34 (b)), so 0.5 sec from timing t1. At time t2, the second distribution member 310 switches from the non-distributed state (the state where the game balls are distributed to the ball distribution unit 185) to the distribution state (the state where the game balls are distributed to the entrance guide unit 215). It is done. When the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is the operation pattern SA, the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 sec. The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is also controlled based on the opening start timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, which is not shown for convenience.

  Thereafter, for example, at the timing t5 which is the middle timing of the second release, the game ball wins the accessory device 150 in a situation where the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state (strictly speaking, When the winning game ball reaches the second distribution member 310), the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39C and 39D). At this time, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp inlet 214 is in a closed state in which the warp inlet 214 is closed (FIG. 39E). For this reason, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance portion 214.

  Thereafter, another winning ball that is distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side by the second distribution member 310 and directed to the rotator 201 through the left guide passage 183 is, for example, at a timing t6 that is a middle timing of the fifth release. When the rotary body 201 distributes to the V winning opening guide 204 and passes the V winning opening 182a, it is detected by the V winning sensor 192, and the V winning flag is turned on (stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114). State) (FIG. 39 (g)). Thereby, the round continuation condition is satisfied, and the execution of the third round game (next round game) is confirmed.

  When the game ball is won in the accessory device 150 while the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state at the timing t7 which is the halfway timing of the 14th release, the game ball becomes the second sorting member. 310 is distributed to the entrance guide 215 side. However, since the game balls are already stored, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 are rebounded by the stored game balls and distributed to the guide passage 183 side. In this way, even if a plurality of game balls are distributed to the entrance guide 215 side in a timely manner, the number of stored game balls is limited to one.

  At the timing t8 thereafter, when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches nine, which is the maximum number of winnings per round, the opening of the opening and closing accessory 168 in the second round game is completed, The opening / closing member 168 is switched to the closed state. Thereafter, the end of the round game is waited with the opening / closing accessory 168 in the closed state, and the state is from the closing timing (timing t7) of the opening / closing accessory 168 to the timing t9 when the waiting time at the end (3.5 sec) elapses. Maintained.

  As described above, the waiting time at the end is set in consideration of a period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150. For this reason, the round game of the second round is completed in a state where all of the game balls won in the accessory device 150 are discharged except for the game balls stored in front of the warp inlet 214. Therefore, it is avoided that the round game ends before the last winning ball passes through either the V winning opening 182a or the outflow opening 182b in the round game (before the result for the last winning ball is determined). For this reason, when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the maximum number of winnings per round, no V winning has occurred and the continuation condition (condition for performing the third round game) is satisfied. Even if it is not in a state, the continuation condition can be satisfied by the last winning ball passing the V winning. Therefore, it is possible to expect the continuation condition to be satisfied until the final winning ball is discharged.

  If the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192 after the end waiting time has elapsed, it is not treated as a V winning and the continuation condition is not satisfied. That is, the V winning is generated only when the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192 before the end standby time elapses. In that sense, the waiting time at the end can be said to be the effective period of the V prize.

  When the second round game is completed at timing t9, the start of the third round game is awaited with the opening / closing accessory 168 in a closed state. This state is maintained until a waiting time (1.5 sec) between rounds elapses from timing t9.

  Further, at timing t9, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp inlet 214 is switched from a closed state in which the warp inlet 214 is closed to an open state in which the warp inlet 214 is opened (FIG. 39 ( e)). Thereby, the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 in the entrance guide 215 proceeds to the warp entrance 214 and enters the warp passage 210. The game ball that has entered the warp passage 210 descends the spiral passage 213 and is then guided to the V guide passage 260 through the warp outlet 216 and the outlet guide 217, and is guided to the V winning passage 191a (V winning sensor 192). It is burned.

  As already described, the period until the game ball stored at the position before the warp inlet 214 reaches the V prize sensor 192 through the warp passage 210 is about 2 sec. For this reason, the game ball whose storage has been released at the timing t9 reaches the V prize sensor 192 after the waiting period (1.5 sec) provided between the second and third rounds has elapsed.

  At the timing t10 when the waiting period has elapsed, the third round game is started, and the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started (FIGS. 39A and 39B). In the third round game, since the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing combination 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern B (see FIG. 31), the opening state of the opening / closing combination 168 is 1.5 seconds from the timing t3 (FIG. 32 ( Continue until b)).

  At a timing t11 that is delayed about 0.5 sec from the timing t10, the game ball that has flowed down the warp passage 210 reaches the V winning sensor 192. As described above, this game ball is a game ball that is stored in the accessory device 150 in the round game of the second round, and the storage is released at the end of the round game. That is, the game balls stored in the second round game pass the V winning sensor 192 at the timing after the start of the third round game and before the end of the third round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the third round game, and execution of the fourth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39 (g)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round game straddle the round game without being discharged from the accessory device 150, and the third round In the game, the player passes the V winning sensor 192 (V winning). In other words, the game ball that won the prize device 150 in the second round game is not only the third round game that is the next round game, but also the fourth round game that is the next round game. It also affects the implementation of For this reason, the player can play the game aiming at the implementation of the fourth round game while playing the second round game.

  By the way, in the case where storage does not occur in the second round game, even if the storage is released, the above V winning by the stored ball does not occur. In this case, in the round game of the third round, if the V winning is achieved through the distribution by the rotating body 201, the round game of the fourth round is executed.

  Here, paying attention to the method for carrying out the round game of the fourth round, storing the game ball in the round game of the second round, and winning the V prize by the route of the rotating body 201 in the round game of the third round. There are two things to generate. That is, an opportunity to acquire the right to perform the fourth round can be given not only to the third round but also to the second round. Accordingly, a period in which a game can be played aiming at the implementation of the fourth round can be provided over a plurality of rounds of the second round and the third round, and the expectation for the continuation of the round can be maintained for a long time.

  Also, even if the winning ball cannot be stored in the second round game, if the gaming ball won in the third round passes V in the round, the fourth round can be performed. The round can be positioned as a re-challenge round. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the fourth round is easily performed, and it is possible to arouse game motivation.

  At this time, in the present embodiment, since the stored game ball always reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210, if the storage can be achieved, the game ball will be V rather than passing through the rotating body 201. Probability of winning will be greatly increased. For this reason, not only can a strong expectation to expect the game ball to be stored, but also the game can be played with peace of mind when the game ball is stored. In addition, the required number of stored game balls can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in the size of the storage area in the accessory device 150. In the accessory device 150, a large number of game parts such as a guide passage 183 that serves as a flow path for game balls and a rotating body 201 for distributing the game balls are mounted. Be strong. For this reason, it becomes possible to facilitate the accessory design by reducing the size of the storage area.

  On the other hand, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distributed state is shorter than the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distributed state, and the winning ball to the accessory device 150 is used for entrance by the second distribution member 310. The probability of distribution to the guide unit 215 side is lower than the probability of distribution to the ball distribution unit 185 side. Thereby, it is suppressed that it becomes advantageous too much for a player.

  In the present embodiment, even if a V prize is generated, the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is released reaches the upper limit opening number or the total number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number. The game continues. With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game aiming for winning up to the upper limit number, even though the game balls released from storage are configured to win V in the early stage of the round game. Not only that, it is also possible to ensure an appropriate period of playing for new storage.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the storage is released before the start of the third round game, and at the start of the round game, the game ball storage area (entrance guide unit 215) in the accessory device 150 is stored. It is vacant. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of new storage can be anticipated from the beginning of a round game. For example, in a configuration in which storage is canceled in the middle of a round game, it must be aimed at the occurrence of storage in the remaining time, but according to the present embodiment, the storage of storage using the entire round game It becomes possible to aim at the outbreak.

  It is also conceivable that the distance between the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 is set to be twice or more the diameter of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls can be stored. In this case, if the number of storage is less than the upper limit number, the game ball can be newly stored without canceling the storage. Therefore, even if the storage is canceled in the middle of the round game, a new storage from the beginning of the round game is possible. It is possible to anticipate the occurrence. However, in addition to incurring difficulty in the design of an accessory due to the expansion of the storage area, it is necessary to devise a mechanism to prevent a new storage ball from being released together when the storage is released. Taking these into account, the configuration of the present embodiment is preferable.

  Further, the storage release of the game balls stored in the second round is executed before the second sorting member 310 is first switched to the sorting state in the third round. In this case, after securing a space in the storage area, the game balls can be distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. Thereby, even though the game ball won in the accessory device 150 can be directed toward the entrance guide portion 215 side, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the storage is hindered by the already stored game ball. Is possible.

  Further, the storage release of the stored game balls is not performed under the situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, but is performed in the situation where it is in the closed state. In an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize in the accessory device 150, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball wins. For this reason, when the storage is canceled under the open state, the player may miss the release of the storage. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the storage is released in a closed state in which winning to the accessory device 150 is unlikely to occur, it is possible to suppress oversight of the player.

  After the above, for example, when a game ball is won in the accessory device 150 in a state where the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state at the timing t12 which is the middle timing of the third release, the game The spheres are distributed by the second distribution member 310 to the entrance guide portion 215 side (FIGS. 39C and 39D). At this time, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp inlet 214 is in a closed state in which the warp inlet 214 is closed (FIG. 39E). For this reason, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance portion 214.

  Then, when the third round game ends at timing t13, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 39 (e)), and the storage is released. The game ball whose storage has been released reaches the V winning sensor 192 at a timing t15 slightly delayed from the start timing (timing t14) of the fourth round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the fourth round game, and execution of the fifth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39 (g)).

<About the playability of each round game>
Next, the gameability of each round game in the second opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the playability of each round game.

  The winning characteristic to the accessory device 150 in the second round game is the winning characteristic A that the game ball can easily win the accessory device 150 at each opening from the first to the 13th time (see FIG. 32 (e)). It has become. On the other hand, in the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in the first to thirteenth releases, the winning ball reaches the rotating body 201 from the first to the sixth in the first half. The distribution characteristic A is easy (see FIG. 34C), and the seventh to thirteenth half of the latter half is the distribution characteristic B in which the winning balls are easily stored in the accessory device 150. For this reason, in the round game of the second round, it is easy to expect both the V prize (self-maintenance) via the rotating body 201 and the storage of the winning ball.

  Since the round game of the second round is the first round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, there is no carry-over of the winning ball from the previous round game by the stored ball. For this reason, in order to carry out the third round game, it is necessary to make a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the second round game. Therefore, by making the gameability as described above, it is easy to generate the V winning, and the implementation difficulty level of the third round is suppressed from becoming excessively high.

  By the way, the round game is configured to end when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number (9). For this reason, the round game may end in the middle of the second game section. In this case, if the state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 is a configuration in which the winning ball is generated prior to the state in which the winning ball is likely to reach the rotating body 201, the round is brought into an early stage before or after switching to the latter state. There is a possibility that the game is over and the opportunity to continue on its own (V winning for implementing the third round) may not be provided satisfactorily. As a result, despite the fact that the game balls are stored in the second round and the right to perform the fourth round is acquired, the third round is not performed, and the above-mentioned storage is likely to return to nothing. .

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the second round, the state in which the winning ball easily reaches the rotating body 201 is configured to occur before the state in which the winning ball is easily stored in the accessory device 150. By having such a structure, the opportunity of a self-continuation is ensured suitably and the 3rd round becomes easy to be implemented. This makes it easier to provide the gameability that the execution of the third round is finalized and the right to perform the fourth round is also acquired.

  The winning characteristic to the accessory device 150 in the third round game is a winning characteristic B in which the game ball can easily win the accessory device 150 at each opening from the seventh time to the thirteenth time (see FIG. 32 (e)). It has become. On the other hand, as for the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the seventh to the thirteenth, the winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150 as in the second round. The distribution characteristic B is easy. For this reason, in the third round game, the game is weighted on the game in which the winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150.

  In this case, if the winning ball can be stored in the second round, the storing ball wins V in the third round, the execution of the fourth round is confirmed, and the winning ball is stored in the third round. If you can, you can get the right to implement the fifth round. On the other hand, if the winning ball is not stored in the second round, even if the winning ball is stored in the third round, the fourth round may not be implemented, so the fifth round is not necessarily implemented. Not exclusively. In this way, in a round game in which a game in which a winning ball is stored in the accessory device 150 is weighted, the game result of the previous round (whether it has been stored or not) greatly affects.

  In addition, in each opening of the first to sixth times and the 14th to 19th times in the third round, it is not impossible to win a prize device 150. For this reason, although it is more difficult than the second round, it is possible to make a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the round game of the third round. The game characteristics of the round games of the fourth to seventh rounds are the same as the game characteristics of the third round.

  The winning characteristic to the accessory device 150 in the round game of the eighth round to the eleventh round is the winning characteristic D that makes it easy for the game ball to win the accessory device 150 at each opening from the 14th to the 19th round (FIG. 32 ( e)). That is, in the round games of the 8th to 11th rounds, it is difficult for a prize to be awarded to the accessory device 150 at each of the first to 13th releases. Therefore, in these round games, it is difficult for both the storage of game balls and the V winning through the rotating body 201 to occur until the end of the round game, and the round game may end without both. It will be a game with a sense of frustration.

  On the other hand, according to the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 14th to the 19th, the winning balls are easily stored in the accessory device 150 and reach the rotating body 201. The distribution characteristic C is easy to perform. That is, at the end of the round in which winning to the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, both the storage of game balls and the V winning via the rotating body 201 are likely to occur.

  In the round game of the 12th to 16th rounds, the winning characteristic to the accessory device 150 is the winning characteristic C (see FIG. 32) that the game ball can easily win the accessory device 150 at each opening from the first to the sixth round. e)). On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the first time to the sixth time are the distribution characteristics A in which the winning ball easily reaches the rotating body 201. For this reason, in these round games, it is game nature that puts a weight on the V prize (continuation of own power) via the rotating body 201.

  In this way, the game is made different depending on the round, such as giving a weight to a game for storing a winning ball in one round, and giving a weight to a game that achieves continuation of one's own power in another round. Thereby, a plurality of games can be enjoyed in one second opening / closing execution mode, and monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

  At this time, the operation patterns of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are made common in each round, and the game characteristics are varied depending on the opening / closing pattern of each round. In this case, it is not necessary to set both the operation patterns of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 and the opening / closing pattern in each round, and it is sufficient to set only the opening / closing pattern. For this reason, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 81 and the work load at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10.

  Moreover, the following effects are also expected by the above configuration. In a configuration in which the winning ball to the accessory device 150 is in an advantageous state (round continuation) by winning V, the player's attention is likely to be gathered in the whereabouts of the gaming ball winning the accessory device 150. In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 that influence the flow of the winning ball and is watching the movement. Under such circumstances, if the operation patterns of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotator 201 in each round are made different, the player may notice that, and there is a risk that the player will be awakened by understanding that the characteristic change has been pre-configured. is there. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the movements of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are common in each round, such awareness can be suppressed. Thereby, it becomes easy to feel the difference in the ease of storage between rounds as a result of chance, and the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game ball can be suitably provided.

<Remaining sphere monitoring flow>
Next, the flow of remaining sphere monitoring will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of remaining sphere monitoring.

  As already described, in this embodiment, a winning ball for the accessory device 150 can be stored in the accessory device 150 in each round game, and the stored ball is stored in the accessory device 150 in the subsequent round game. It is to be discharged from. For this reason, in the round game in which storage has occurred, the number of discharged balls is smaller than the number of winning balls at the end of the round game. In this case, if the remaining ball determination process is performed for each round, the remaining ball frequently becomes abnormal even though the game is played normally, and the progress of the game may be hindered.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the remaining sphere determination process is not performed for each round, but is performed only once at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (timing t18). Thereby, although it is the structure which can be discharged | emitted in the next round, the game ball which won the prize apparatus 150 can suppress that it becomes a residual ball | bowl abnormality frequently, and it becomes possible to advance a game smoothly.

  Here, the flow of the remaining sphere monitoring using the remaining sphere determination process is summarized as follows. As described above, the remaining sphere monitoring in the second opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the remaining sphere counter RPC (see step S2411 in FIG. 38). This remaining ball counter RPC is updated throughout the start and end of the mode without being cleared in the middle of the second opening / closing execution mode. Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the end of the ending. If it is not 0 (when the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls do not match), it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode, specifically, from the timing at which the first prize to the accessory device 150 is generated in the second round. The period up to the timing when the final winning ball is discharged from the accessory device 150 in the 16th round, which is a round, is performed as the monitoring target period.

  However, even if the number of balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is counted, it is not possible to specify which discharged ball is the final ball. Therefore, in this embodiment, all winning balls to the accessory device 150 are discharged. At the end of the ending that is expected to occur, the remaining sphere is determined. If the second opening / closing execution mode does not continue until the 16th round and ends in the middle round, that round becomes the final round, and the remaining sphere determination process is performed at the end of the ending performed after the end of the round. .

  Here, as an event that causes a residual ball abnormality, for example, an act of illegally trying to make a V prize by making an illegal ball attached with a thread enter the accessory device 150 and operating the illegal ball through the thread is performed. The case where it was broken can be considered. In this case, when the illegal ball is operated so as to repeatedly pass the V winning sensor 192 by repeatedly pulling or loosening the thread, the number of balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is larger than the number of winning balls in the accessory device 150. The number increases and they do not agree.

  If it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal due to such an event, the game shifts to the game stop state, and the game progress is stopped. When it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal, an external signal indicating the occurrence of the remaining ball is output to the management control device on the game hall side. By these processes, the cheating is suppressed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game balls that have won the prize device 150 can be stored in the prize device 150, and the stored balls can pass through the V prize sensor 192 (V prize opening 182a) in the next round game. Normally, the round game in which the right to conduct can be obtained by a winning ball in one round game is the next round as viewed from the round game in which the winning has occurred. The execution right can be acquired, and novel gameplay can be realized.

  At that time, when the winning game ball is not stored in the accessory device 150, the winning ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the winning has occurred. In this case, for example, when focusing on the implementation of the fourth round, an opportunity to acquire the right to perform the round is given over a plurality of rounds of the second round and the third round. As a result, the expectation for the continuation of the round can be maintained for a long time, and the interest can be improved.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 and the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a timing chart for explaining a game flow in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  The distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 in the second to fourth rounds is the same as that in the first embodiment. That is, after 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of each opening in each round game, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 can be switched to the distribution state to be distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side, and then 0.3 sec. That state is maintained over time (see FIG. 34B).

  On the other hand, in the round game of the fifth round, as shown in FIG. 42, the second distribution member 310 receives the game balls won in the accessory device 150 from the start to the end of the round game. The non-distributed state of being distributed to the guide passage 183 side is maintained. In other words, in the fifth round game, the second distribution member 310 cannot be switched to the distribution state (see FIG. 42B).

  For this reason, in the round game of the fifth round, the game ball won in the accessory device 150 cannot move to the entrance guide unit 215, and the storage of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is restricted. Although not shown in FIG. 42, the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168, the sorting mode of the first sorting member 300, and the operating mode of the rotating body 201 are the same as those in the first embodiment. It is.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed at the end of the fifth round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the timing when the end standby time has elapsed after the end of the final opening and closing in the fifth round. If the remaining sphere counter RPC is not 0, it is determined that the remaining sphere is abnormal, and the remaining sphere flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 114. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining sphere determination is performed during the second opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, an example of the flow of the round game from the second round to the fifth round will be described. Here, it is assumed that the same number of game balls as the upper limit number (9) are awarded to the accessory device 150 in each of the second to fifth rounds. In each of the second to fourth rounds, the timing at which the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state and the timing of winning the game ball to the accessory device 150 match, It is assumed that game balls are stored in the device 150.

  When a game ball is stored in the second round game (timing t21), the game ball is maintained in the storage state until the end of the round. Then, at the timing t22 when the second round game ends, the storage is released by switching the shutter 221 to the open state. A predetermined movement period (approximately 2 seconds) is required for the game ball whose storage has been released to reach the V prize sensor 192. Therefore, the game ball has received the V prize sensor 192 after the third round of the game has started. (Timing t23).

  That is, the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 after the third round game is started. For this reason, at the timing t22 when the round game of the second round ends, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is one less than the number of game balls won to the accessory device 150. Become.

  In the third round game, the game balls released from the storage in the second round game reach the V winning sensor 192, and the number of discharged balls is incremented by one. However, the game balls are stored at the timing t24, and the game balls won in the accessory device 150 during the third round are carried over to the fourth round. Since the added amount is canceled by the carry-over amount, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is still one less at the timing t25 when the round game of the third round ends.

  Similarly, at the timing t27 when the round game of the fourth round is completed, the winning balls are stored in the middle of the fourth round (timing t26), so that the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is 1. It becomes the state where there are few. In other words, at the end of each of the second to fourth rounds, the number of winnings and the number of dischargings cannot be matched even if the game is played properly, so the remaining ball determination is not performed at these timings.

  In the round game of the fifth round, since the game balls released from the storage in the round game of the fourth round reach the V winning sensor 192, the number of discharged balls is incremented by 1 (timing t28). In addition, since the storage of game balls is regulated in the fifth round game, all the game balls won during the fifth round are discharged during the fifth round. For this reason, when the winning number and the discharging number are compared for only five rounds, the number of discharging is one more than the winning number. This surplus compensates for the shortage of the number of discharged items that occurred at the end of the fourth round, and the total number of winning prizes matches the number of discharged items.

  In addition, when looking at the player, even though the storage was possible up to the fourth round, the second sorting member 310 suddenly became unable to switch to the sorting state in the fifth round, Storage is impossible. For this reason, there is a risk of misunderstanding that a failure has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified by notification that storage is possible in the second to fourth rounds but not in the fifth round. As such a configuration, in the round game of the second to fourth rounds, on the display screen G of the accessory device 150, specific notifications such as character display, character display, background display, etc. suggesting that storage is possible On the other hand, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is not performed in the round game of the fifth round, or a configuration in which different notifications are made in the round games of the second to fourth rounds and the fifth round.

  At timing t29, which is the end of the fifth round game, the remaining ball determination is performed. That is, the remaining sphere determination is performed with the second to fifth rounds as the monitoring target period. As described above, in a situation where the game is played normally, the number of winnings and the number of dischargings are usually matched and the remaining ball counter RPC becomes zero. In this case, the remaining ball abnormality is not recognized, and the game after the sixth round is continued. On the other hand, for example, when an act of repeatedly passing the V winning sensor 192 with an illegal ball with a thread attached thereto, the number of discharged balls is larger than the number of winning balls, resulting in a remaining ball abnormality.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a round game in which storage is restricted is provided, and the remaining balls are determined at the end of the round game, so that the winning balls are discharged in the next round. The remaining sphere determination can be performed in the middle of the second opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to quickly grasp the remaining ball abnormality, and it is possible to suppress an increase in damage to the game hall when an illegal act is performed.

  As with the 2nd to 4th rounds, in the round games of the 6th to 9th rounds, storage of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 10th round game, storage is restricted. Is done. In addition, in the 11th to 15th round games, storage of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 16th round game, storage is restricted. Then, at the end of the round game of the 10th and 16th rounds (timing t30, t31), the remaining ball determination is performed. That is, in one second opening / closing execution mode, remaining sphere determination is performed every predetermined number of rounds.

  It should be noted that the round in which the remaining ball determination is performed by restricting storage is arbitrary, and is not limited to the fifth, tenth, and sixteenth rounds. Further, the number of rounds for which the storage is restricted is also arbitrary. For example, the remaining ball determination may be performed by restricting the storage only once in the eighth round.

  When it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal, the game shifts to the game stop state as in the first embodiment. By the way, the remaining ball abnormality is not limited to an illegal act, but may occur even when the storage is not properly released due to the malfunction of the shutter 221. For example, if for some reason the shutter 221 is not switched to the open state at the end of the fourth round, the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the number of discharged balls at the end of the fifth round. Is one less than the number of winning prizes.

  As described above, since the remaining sphere abnormality is not necessarily caused by an illegal act, it is desirable that the response when the remaining sphere abnormality occurs is changed depending on whether it is based on the illegal action. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following configuration.

  After the transition to the game stop state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on by operating the power switch 92b by a game hall clerk or the like to release it, but at this time, the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing (step S509) of the RAM 114 is executed in the main processing (FIG. 18). As a result, the V winning in the round game of the fifth round (timing t28 in FIG. 42) is invalidated, and it becomes impossible to play the continuation of the second opening / closing execution mode (round game of the sixth round).

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, the initialization process of the RAM 114 (step S509) is not executed. Further, the remaining ball abnormality state is canceled by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing, and the game state before the transition to the game stop state is restored. As a result, the V-winning in the fifth round becomes effective, and it becomes possible to play the continuation.

  With such a configuration, when a fraudulent act is confirmed when an attendant of the game hall rushes under the pachinko machine 10, by turning on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 98a, After that, fraudsters are prevented from continuing to receive unfair profits. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that it is not a fraudulent act or if a fraudulent act is not confirmed, it is possible to play the continuation by turning on the power without operating the RAM erase switch 98a, and the player's benefit Can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, in the case where a difference is provided between a regular player and an unauthorized person, the following configuration may be used.

  First, when shifting to the game stop state, the shutter 221 is closed. That is, when the shutter 221 is in the closed state at the time of transition to the game stop state, the operation of the shutter 221 is controlled so that the closed state is maintained even after the transition to the game stop state. Thereby, when the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150, the game state is shifted to the game stop state without being released.

  After that, in order to cancel the game stop state, the power switch 92b is operated by a game attendant or the like to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10, but in that case, the shutter 221 is maintained in the closed state. That is, the stored state is maintained even after the power is turned off. Incidentally, in this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not driven, the shutter 221 is in a closed state. For this reason, it is not necessary to supply backup power to the shutter drive unit 221a at the time of power interruption. Note that in a configuration in which the shutter 221 is closed by driving the shutter drive unit 221a, backup power may be supplied to the shutter drive unit 221a to be in an excited state.

  Then, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, the pachinko machine 10 is started up without switching the shutter 221 to the open state. In this case, the remaining ball abnormality state is canceled by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing (FIG. 18), and the game state before the transition to the game stop state is restored. Also in this case, the storage state is maintained without switching the shutter 221 to the open state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the remaining ball abnormality and the game stop state with the stored ball remaining. Thereby, it becomes possible to play the continuation of the game interrupted by the game stop process using the remaining storage ball as the service ball. That is, the round game of the sixth round is originally a round in which there is no carry-over ball from the previous round, but if the game is stopped due to malfunction of the shutter 221, etc., there is a carry-over ball. It becomes possible to play the sixth round.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed and the power is turned on, the initialization of the RAM is executed, and the continuation of the game cannot be performed. Therefore, the service ball as described above cannot be provided. If the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is being pressed, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 to the open state. Specifically, after an affirmative determination is made in step S503 of the main process (FIG. 18), a process of switching the shutter 221 to the open state is executed before setting the interrupt permission in step S516. As a result, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the accessory device 150 and the second sorting member 310 is operated and the game ball is illegally stored, the illegal act is again performed by the stored ball. Can be suppressed.

  At that time, an interrupt permission setting process (step S516) is executed after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed. That is, when the shutter 221 is switched to the open state as the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the V winning is validated after the predetermined waiting time has elapsed after the RAM erase switch 98a is operated. In this case, the predetermined waiting time is set to be longer than the required period until the released game ball reaches the V winning sensor 192. With such a configuration, the game ball released and stored at the time of start-up passes through the V prize sensor 192, thereby causing a V prize or a V prize error (a V prize occurs at a timing at which no V prize should occur). Error) can be suppressed.

  Instead of the standby process, an interrupt permission setting process may be performed after the discharge confirmation process. In other words, it may be configured that, based on the detection of the passage of the V winning sensor 192, it is grasped that the released game ball has been discharged from the accessory device 150, and thereafter, interrupt permission is set.

  Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 98a is pressed, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state so that the operation of the shutter 221 can be confirmed by an attendant or the like. That is, although no illegal act has been found, this can be done by operating the RAM erase switch 98a when it is necessary to check whether the shutter 221 operates correctly.

  In the above embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed at the end of the fifth round. However, in the waiting period (round interval period) provided between the fifth and sixth rounds, the remaining balls are determined. It is good also as a structure which performs determination. In short, it is sufficient that the remaining ball determination is performed in response to the end of the fifth round, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination is any timing after the end of the fifth round and before the start of the sixth round. It is optional. The same applies to the remaining sphere determination performed at the end of the 10th and 16th rounds.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above embodiments in the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168, the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination in the second opening / closing execution mode. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening / closing pattern table of the opening / closing accessory 168 according to the present embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure same as said each embodiment in the same figure, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, opening / closing patterns B 'to D' shown in Figs. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are set instead of the opening / closing patterns B to D shown in Figs. 32 (b) to 32 (d). These open / close patterns B ′ to D ′ are defined by open / close pattern tables stored in various table storage areas 113 d of the ROM 113.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c), each open / close pattern table has a round game for the first game section corresponding to the first to second opening and the third to eighth opening. The opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 is divided for each game section after being divided into a corresponding second game section, a third game section from the 9th to the 13th time, and a fourth game section from the 14th to the 19th time. Is specified.

  In the opening / closing patterns B ′ to D ′, during the opening of 19 times in one round game, in the first to second time (RC2 = 19 to 18) belonging to the first game section, the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) A shorter opening of 0.1 sec is performed, and then the closing is performed for 0.5 sec (also referred to as a short opening mode). In the subsequent game section, either the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2 is set as in the case of FIG. These open / close patterns P1, P2 both have longer open times than the short open mode. That is, in this embodiment, in each of the open / close patterns B ′ to D ′, the open / close function is performed in a short open mode in which the period of the open state is relatively short until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the round game. The object 168 is controlled, and thereafter, the opening / closing member 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2 having a relatively long period of opening.

  Here, the short open mode has a very short period of 0.1 sec. Moreover, the period which becomes a closed state in the short open mode is 0.5 sec which is relatively longer than the open period. That is, in the situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled in the short open mode, most of them are in the closed state and are switched to the open state for a very short time. For this reason, in the short open mode, the winning of the game ball to the accessory device 150 does not occur. In this sense, the short open mode can also be referred to as a winning regulation mode that regulates winnings to the accessory device 150.

  Next, the remaining sphere determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing remaining sphere determination processing according to the present embodiment. Note that the processing in steps S2701 to S2703 shown in FIG. 44 is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 in FIG. 38, and is executed instead of the processing in steps S2406 and S2407 in FIG. .

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the second opening / closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2701 whether it is the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination. In the present embodiment, when the second opening / closing execution mode is executed, the remaining sphere determination is performed corresponding to each round. Specifically, the remaining ball determination is performed at a timing when a predetermined period (1 sec) has elapsed from the start of each round game.

  The elapsed time since the start of the round game is grasped by using determination counters provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. That is, a value corresponding to 1 sec is set in the determination counter, and this is updated (subtracted) by a timer interrupt process, and is updated at a predetermined cycle. Then, when the determination counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp that the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination has arrived.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that it is not the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination, the remaining sphere determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution timing of the remaining sphere is determined, the process proceeds to step S2702, where it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0”, and the remaining sphere is determined. The remaining sphere determination in this case is intended for a period from when one remaining sphere determination is executed until the next remaining sphere determination is executed. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 every time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35), and 1 decrement every time a discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is incremented (step S2303 in FIG. 37).

  If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2703, and the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150. To do. Thereafter, the remaining sphere determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2703 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is “0”, it is determined that no gaming ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the present remaining ball determination process is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a timing chart for explaining a game flow in the second opening / closing execution mode. Here, description will be made assuming that game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 in the middle of the second round.

  When the second round game is completed at timing t41, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball stored in the entrance guide 215 moves toward the warp passage 210. At the same time, a standby state (round interval) for waiting for the start of the third round game is entered, and the standby state is continued for 1.5 seconds. Here, it takes about 2 sec for the released game ball to reach the V prize sensor 192, and this time is about 0.5 sec longer than the duration of the round interval. For this reason, the game ball whose storage has been released reaches the V prize sensor 192 after about 0.5 sec after the start of the third round game (timing t43).

  When the third round game is started at timing t42, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open and close in a short opening manner. Since the short open mode repeats the open state for 0.1 sec and the closed state for 0.5 sec twice, the execution period of the short open mode is 1.2 sec in total (timing) t45).

  In addition, at the timing t44 when 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the third round game, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the second round game is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not all game balls won in the accessory device 150 in the second round game have been discharged from the accessory device 150. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the round game of the second round is determined from the end of the second round for a predetermined period (2.5 sec obtained by adding 1.5 sec as the round interval period and the above 1 sec). ). When the number of game balls won to the accessory device 150 does not match the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 in the determination process, it is handled as a remaining ball abnormality.

  Similarly, at the end of the round game of the third round, the storage is released (timing t46), and the game ball whose storage has been released has passed about 0.5 sec after the start of the round game of the fourth round. To V winning sensor 192 (timing t48). Further, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to be opened and closed in a short opening manner until 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round (timing t50), and at timing t49 when 1 sec has elapsed from the start of the fourth round, Remaining sphere determination is performed. This remaining ball determination corresponds to the third round game. That is, it is a process for confirming whether or not all the game balls won in the accessory device 150 in the third round game are discharged from the accessory device 150.

  Here, the relationship between the number of game balls won in the accessory device 150 and the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 will be described. Here, the above relationship will be described for the period from timing t45 to t50.

  When the short opening mode ends at timing t45, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to either the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2. In these opening / closing modes, winning in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and winning occurs between timings t45 and t46. Of the game balls won in the accessory device 150, game balls other than the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 by timing t46 when the third round ends. For this reason, at timing t46, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is one less than the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150.

  When the fourth round is started at timing t47, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open and close in a short opening manner until timing t50 when 1.2 seconds elapse from timing t47. In the short release mode, a game ball cannot be won in the accessory device 150, and therefore no new win is generated between timings t47 and t50.

  Here, 1.2 sec, which is the execution period of the short release mode, is longer than the elapsed period (about 0.5 sec) until the stored release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 after the start of the fourth round. . For this reason, the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 during the execution of the short release mode. As described above, since a new winning is not generated during the execution of the short opening mode, at the timing t48 when the stored release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 and the accessory The number of game balls discharged from the device 150 matches.

  This state is maintained until timing t50 when the short opening mode ends. For this reason, the remaining ball abnormality is appropriately determined by performing the remaining ball determination at the timing t49 after the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 and before the end of the short release mode. Can do.

  As described above, the game ball stored in the previous round game is passed through the V prize sensor 192 during the period in which the opening / closing tool 168 is controlled to be opened / closed in a short opening mode. The storage release ball can be passed through V while avoiding the period in which the ball wins. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the storage release ball and the winning ball from being mixed in the accessory device 150 and to make it easier to understand which game ball has passed V.

  In addition, since the remaining ball determination is performed while the short release mode is being executed and the storage release ball has passed V, the remaining ball determination for each round can be performed even while the game ball is carried over. It becomes possible to make the pachinko machine 10 strong against the remaining ball abnormality. In addition, since the remaining ball determination is performed in an overlapping manner with the round game, smooth progress of the game can be promoted as compared to the case where the round game is started after the remaining ball determination is performed.

  Although the short opening mode, the opening / closing accessory 168 is in an open state, so that a winning may occur depending on the flow situation of the game ball. In this case, if it is immediately determined that the remaining ball is abnormal due to the mismatch between the number of winning and the number of discharging, game interruption due to erroneous determination is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining ball abnormality is not caused when the number of prizes and the number of discharges is one, but the remaining ball abnormality is not caused when the number of consecutive winnings is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

<Fourth embodiment>
In the second opening / closing execution mode, the second round game, which is the first round, has no carry-over (storage) of game balls from the previous round game. The third and subsequent rounds cannot be implemented unless the V-winning prize (continuation of one's own power) is achieved. For this reason, compared to round games after the third round where a carry-on ball can be expected, the difficulty of acquiring the right to perform the next round is higher, and the second open / close execution mode ends by the second round. easy.

  In particular, when the game ball can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round, but the self-continuation cannot be achieved, the second opening / closing execution mode is not limited to being terminated early, Precious storage balls will be spoiled. In this case, the player is greatly discouraged and there is a risk that the willingness to play is attenuated. The present embodiment is intended to provide relief in such a case, and the configuration will be described in detail below.

  In this embodiment, the switching mode of the shutter 221 is different from the above embodiments. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the mid-opening process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 in the present embodiment. Here, the processing of steps S2801 to S2804 shown in FIG. 46 is executed between steps S2104 and S2105 in the open-use processing of FIG. 35 is a process for switching the opening / closing accessory 168 from the open state to the closed state in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  After the remaining sphere counter RPC is updated in step S2104, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “15”. The first round counter RC1 counts what round game it is, and in step S2801, whether or not the currently executed round game is the first round (second round) in the second opening / closing execution mode. Determine whether.

  When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “15” and the currently executed round game is the second round, the process proceeds to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “1”. . The winning counter PC counts the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150, and the value indicates the number of remaining winnings up to the upper limit winning number (9). In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 remains in the state up to the upper limit winning number.

  If the value of the prize counter PC is “1” and the number of prizes received to the accessory device 150 is one remaining up to the upper limit prize quantity, in step S2803 the V prizes are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. It is determined whether a flag is stored. In other words, in the second round game, it is determined whether or not the V winning (continuation of own power) via the rotating body 201 has been achieved.

  If the V winning flag is not stored and the continuation of own power is not achieved, the shutter release process is executed in step S2804. In step S2804, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, when the game ball is stored in the entrance guide 215 (see FIG. 8), the storage is released and the game ball moves toward the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210.

  After execution of step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2105, and a determination process is performed as to whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in steps S2801 and S2802, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the process also proceeds to step S2105.

<About the game flow>
Next, a game flow according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the second round game. Here, the description will be made assuming that the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150 at the timing t51 in the middle of the second round.

  At the timing t52, when the eighth game ball is won in the accessory device 150 (FIG. 47C), it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the example shown in FIG. 47, since the V winning flag is not stored (FIG. 47 (g)), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the same timing t52 (FIG. 47 (e)). As a result, the storage of the game ball is released (FIG. 47 (f)).

  The movement time until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is about 2 seconds, and each round game in the second opening / closing execution mode is provided with a waiting time at the end of 3.5 seconds. For this reason, the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 at the timing t53 before the timing t54 at which the second round ends (FIG. 47 (g)). As a result, a V prize is generated in the round game of the second round, and the execution right of the third round is acquired.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not V is passed (whether or not the self-continuation is achieved) at the specific timing of the second round (timing that is one remaining until the upper limit winning number), and V is passed. If not, the shutter 221 is opened to release the storage, and V is passed in the second round game, so that it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the third round is not executed even though the game ball is stored. .

  Since the shutter 221 opening process is performed regardless of whether or not there is storage, the shutter 221 is opened at timing t52 even when there is no storage ball in the second round game. However, since there is no storage ball, no V prize is generated. In other words, the above remedy measures function only when storage can be achieved in the second round of the game, and there is a difference in the preferential degree between when the storage is not achieved. .

  Although not shown in FIG. 47, if the V winning flag is stored at timing t52, that is, if self-continuation can be achieved, the shutter 221 is not opened at timing t53, and the above-mentioned number As in the first embodiment, the shutter 221 is opened at the timing t54 when the second round ends. For this reason, the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 in the third round, and thereby the right to perform the fourth round is acquired. In other words, it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where continuation of self-power cannot be achieved in the second round.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in the opening standby time (opening timing), the shutter 221 switching mode, and the remaining ball determination execution timing in the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Briefly describing the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the second opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result) is stored in the accessory device 150 after a predetermined period has elapsed. It is configured to release the storage of game balls. If the timing at which the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 and the execution timing of the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode are well matched. Then, the second opening / closing execution mode by the storage release sphere occurs. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the description will be made assuming that the upper limit of the number of common reservations is one.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release timing table according to the present embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

  In the release timing table, the release standby time is defined in association with the release type counter CS. Here, when there is no holding information, the opening waiting time is a waiting time from winning a prize to the operating ports 38 and 39 to opening the opening / closing accessory 168. When there is holding information, when the holding information is consumed ( This is the waiting time from when the hold information is determined in step S805 (FIG. 21) to the opening information until the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the release table according to the present embodiment, two types, 0.5 sec and 2.5 sec, are set as the open standby time. The opening type counter CS corresponds to “0” to “89” for the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec, and the opening type counter CS corresponds to “90” to “99” for the opening waiting time of 2.5 sec. Yes. That is, the probability that the waiting time for opening 0.5 sec is selected is 9/10, the probability that the waiting time for opening 2.5 sec is selected is 1/10, and the probability of the latter is lower. .

  Next, the remaining sphere determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The process of FIG. 49A is executed instead of the remaining sphere determination process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment.

  In the remaining sphere determination process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The determination waiting flag indicates that the remaining ball determination process is waiting after the second opening / closing execution mode ends, and is set when the second opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If the determination standby flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3002 whether the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed. If the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the process advances to step S3003 to execute the processes of steps S3003 to S3005. Since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S2402 to S2404 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the first opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, the process advances to step S3006 to determine whether the second opening / closing execution mode is being executed. If the second opening / closing execution mode is being executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, the process advances to step S3008 to determine whether or not the ending has been completed, that is, whether or not the ending waiting time has elapsed.

  If the ending has been completed, a shutter setting process is executed in step S3009. In this process, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined period (3.5 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode (ending timing). . In addition, although the maintenance period of an open state is arbitrary, for example, it sets to 0.3 sec similarly to the said 1st Embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S3010, a determination standby time setting process is executed. The determination standby time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in this embodiment, is the standby time from the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode. The determination standby time is a time (about 2 sec) obtained by adding a movement time (about 2 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 to the time (3.5 sec) until the shutter is opened set in step S3009. The predetermined time is longer than 5.5 sec), for example, 6 sec.

  After execution of step S3010, in step S3011, a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then the remaining ball determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3012 to determine whether it is the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination. This process determines whether or not the determination standby time set in step S3010 has elapsed. If it is not the remaining ball determination execution timing, the remaining ball determination process is terminated. If it is the remaining ball determination execution timing, the process proceeds to step S3013 to determine whether the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed. judge. By executing such processing, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination and the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode overlap.

  If the first opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S3014 whether or not the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0”, and remaining sphere determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC in this case is for a period from the start of the second opening / closing execution mode to the execution timing. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 every time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35 or step S1503 in FIG. 27), and the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. Each time it is decremented, it is decremented (step S2303 in FIG. 37 or step S1506 in FIG. 27).

  If it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S3015, and the remaining balls are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that game balls remain in the accessory device 150. Stores the flag. After execution of step S3015, or when it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0”, the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted in step S3016. . Thereafter, the remaining sphere determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3013, that is, if it is determined that the first opening / closing execution mode is being performed, the processing of steps S3014 and S3015 (remaining sphere determination) is skipped, and the processing of step S3016 is executed. The remaining sphere determination in this case is performed in step S3004. That is, if the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination and the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode overlap, the remaining sphere determination is executed at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing normal processing. Note that FIG. 49B shows only the part different from the normal process of FIG. 19, and the process of step S3101 of FIG. 49B is executed by step S606 (game state transition process) of FIG. Done after being done.

  In step S3101, shutter processing is executed. This process is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 in a situation where neither the first opening / closing execution mode nor the second opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, when the driving timing of the shutter 221 set in step S3009 has arrived and the first opening / closing execution mode has not been executed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process. If the first opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the drive timing of the shutter 221 has arrived, the shutter 221 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the process for the in-object operation unit in step S809 of FIG. Switch.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are timing charts for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. When the former is selected as 2.5 seconds as the waiting time for opening, the latter is waiting for opening. The case where 0.5 sec is selected as the time is shown. Here, in both cases of FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the common pending number is one. We will proceed with the explanation.

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, the case where the open waiting time of 2.5 sec is selected will be described. When the second opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t61, the hold information held in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is shifted to the execution area AE, and whether or not it is determined is determined. Is called. In this case, it is assumed that the determination result is a normal release result. After execution of the determination, the waiting for opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started, and this state is continued until the opening waiting time (2.5 sec) elapses.

  When the opening standby time elapses at timing t62, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the opened state. At timing t62, the first opening / closing execution mode is started as the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. At the timing t63 when the opening time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing t62, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the opened state to the closed state. After the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, the end of the first opening / closing execution mode is waited until timing t66 when the end standby time (3.5 sec) elapses. While in the first opening / closing execution mode, when the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192, it is validated and a V winning is generated. Note that the elapsed time from the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode (timing t61) to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode is 2.5 sec, which is an opening standby time, and 0, which is the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168. .5 sec and 6.5 sec which is 3.5 sec which is the waiting time at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, at time t64 when 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (timing t61), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, the storage state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at a timing t65 when approximately 2 seconds have elapsed from the release of storage.

  The arrival timing in this case is 5.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the end timing (timing t66) of the first opening / closing execution mode is 6.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode. ) Before. Therefore, when the stored release ball passes the V winning sensor 192, a V winning is generated and the second opening / closing execution mode is newly started.

  As described above, the game balls stored during the second opening / closing execution mode remain after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the storage is released after the lapse of a predetermined period. It can be made into a villa. As a result, the joy when the winning ball is stored can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, when waiting for storage cancellation after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, a notification indicating the timing of storage cancellation and the standby time until the timing is sent to the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, the speaker unit 64, and the like. It is good also as a structure to perform. For example, when making a notification on the symbol display device 51, it is preferable to perform specific display at the timing of storage release or display a standby time. The display of the waiting time is not limited to the time when the second opening / closing execution mode ends, and the remaining waiting time until the storage release timing may be displayed when the predetermined timing comes after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. Good. Further, for example, a change in the remaining time may be suggested by a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like, or a notification that suggests an elapsed time from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode may be performed. Control regarding these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51 and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, description will be given of a case where an open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected. When the second opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t71, whether or not it is determined based on the hold information held in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is performed. In this case, it is assumed that the determination result is a normal release result. After the execution of the determination, the opening / closing combination 168 is started to be opened until the opening waiting time (0.5 sec) elapses. At timing t72 when the opening standby time has elapsed, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the opened state, and the first opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Further, at time t73 when 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (timing t71), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, the storage state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at a timing t75 when approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the release of storage.

  On the other hand, the first opening / closing execution mode started from the timing t72 is 4 sec from the start of the mode (0.5 sec which is the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the waiting time at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. The process ends at timing t74 when 5 sec). Here, the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode is 4.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode, while the timing at which the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is the second opening / closing execution timing. It becomes 5.5 sec from the end timing of the mode. That is, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the first opening / closing execution mode ends. In this case, even if the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192, it is not effective, and no V winning is generated. For this reason, the new second opening / closing execution mode is not started.

  In this way, when the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected, the second opening / closing execution mode is not linked even when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed. Even in a situation where there is storage and there is a hold, the extended resort in the second opening / closing execution mode is not guaranteed. As a result, even if the game balls are stored and put on hold, it is not possible to get out of mind, and it is possible to keep paying attention to the development of the game until a new second opening / closing execution mode occurs.

  In addition, since the ease with which the second open / close execution mode is selected varies depending on the selected open standby time, it is possible to have a strong interest in which open standby time is selected after the second open / close execution mode ends. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  At that time, when notification is made on the basis of holding digest or winning to the operating ports 38, 39 (when there is no holding), when 2.5 sec open waiting time is selected and 0.5 sec open waiting time It is good to set it as the structure which makes the notification aspect of the said alert | reporting common, or cannot identify. In this case, it becomes difficult to estimate the waiting time for opening from the notification, and it is difficult to predict the extended resort in advance. For this reason, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension until the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 and the presence / absence of consecutive resorts becomes clear. The notification may be performed as a display effect by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as a sound effect by the speaker unit 64.

  In the above description with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, it is assumed that the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the final round in the second opening / closing execution mode, the second distribution member 310 is not fixed to the distribution state side, and the distribution state and the non-distribution according to the distribution pattern table shown in FIG. Switching to the minute state is controlled. For this reason, depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the accessory device 150, the final round (second opening / closing execution mode) may end without the winning ball being distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. With such a configuration, it is possible to arouse a sense of tension that the second opening / closing execution mode may end in a state where there is no storage, and compared to a case where the second opening / closing execution mode is merely digested indifferently. It becomes possible to improve the property.

  Next, the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the remaining sphere determination.

  In the present embodiment, (1) when the first opening / closing execution mode is not executed when the determination waiting time elapses, and (2) when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed when the determination waiting time elapses. The remaining ball determination execution timing is different.

  (1) When the first opening / closing execution mode is not executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52A, the determination waiting time (6 sec) set at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. At the timing t77, the remaining sphere determination is executed. In this case, even if the first opening / closing execution mode is performed after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode and before the determination waiting time elapses, the game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 in the second opening / closing execution mode. After all of the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode and the discharge of the game ball stored at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode from the accessory device 150 are completed. The remaining sphere determination is executed (see the flow from step S3010 to YES in step S3001 in FIG. 49). Therefore, if the game is being played properly, the number of winnings and the number of winnings match, and after the second opening / closing execution mode, the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode, and the first opening / closing execution mode have ended. It is possible to appropriately determine the remaining sphere by summarizing the entry / exit of the game sphere in each situation with the discharge of the storage release sphere.

  FIG. 52A illustrates the case where the first opening / closing execution mode is executed after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. However, even when the first opening / closing execution mode is not performed, the remaining ball determination is appropriately performed. It can be carried out. That is, since the remaining sphere determination is performed after the storage release sphere is discharged, the remaining sphere determination can be performed after eliminating the situation where the number of discharged discharges is reduced by one at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. it can.

  On the other hand, (2) when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed when the determination standby time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), not the timing t77 when the determination standby time has elapsed, but the first opening / closing execution mode. The remaining sphere is determined at the timing t78 when is finished. For example, in the configuration in which the remaining ball determination is performed at the timing t77, in the first opening / closing execution mode, when a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs immediately before the timing t77 and the winning ball is discharged after the timing t77, The remaining ball determination is executed in a state where the number of discharged balls is smaller than the number of winning prizes, and there is a risk of erroneous determination that the remaining ball is abnormal. In this regard, with the configuration shown in FIG. 52 (b), since the remaining ball determination is performed after the discharge of the game ball won in the first opening / closing execution mode is completed, the erroneous determination can be suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a game ball can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Briefly describing this embodiment, in this embodiment, winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result), and the mode ends. In this configuration, the storage state is maintained for a predetermined period. Then, when a new first opening / closing execution mode occurs during the maintenance period of the storage state, the storage state is canceled and a V winning is generated by the storage release ball. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the description will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of common holds is 0, that is, the holding function is not provided.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an opening timing table according to the present embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

  In the release timing table, the release standby time is defined in association with the release type counter CS. Here, the opening waiting time is a waiting time from winning a prize to the operation ports 38 and 39 to opening the opening / closing accessory 168.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the release table according to the present embodiment, two types of release waiting times of 0.5 sec and 2 sec are set. The opening type counter CS corresponds to “0” to “39” for the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec, and the opening type counter CS corresponds to “40” to “99” for the opening waiting time of 2 sec. That is, the probability of selecting the 0.5 sec open standby time is 2/5, and the probability of selecting the 2 sec open standby time is 3/5, and the former probability is lower.

  Next, portions of the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the second sorting member 310 when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed is different from that of the first embodiment. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in this case is set in the second distribution setting process of step S1204 in the control start process of FIG.

  In this embodiment, in step S1204, the operation mode is set such that the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state (a mode in which the game balls are distributed to the entrance guide unit 215) during execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. Set. Specifically, after the period TS1 ′ (0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, the state is switched from the unallocated state to the allocated state, and then returns to the unallocated state after the period TS2 ′ (0.3 sec). Then, the non-distributed state is set so as to be maintained until the opening / closing member 168 is closed. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 can be distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side.

  The operation mode of the shutter 221 during execution of the first opening / closing execution mode is set so as to be maintained in the closed state over the entire first opening / closing execution mode, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the game control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (a) shows only the parts different from the game control process of FIG. 21, and the processing of steps S3201 and S3202 of FIG. 54 (a) is the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S807 of FIG. This is executed as part of the game end process.

  If it is determined in step S807 that the end standby time has elapsed, that is, if it is the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S3201. It is determined whether or not. This process determines whether or not a V winning has occurred in the first opening / closing execution mode.

  If the V winning flag is not stored, a shutter setting process is executed in step S3202. In this process, after the first opening / closing execution mode ends, a standby time B until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state is set. This waiting time B corresponds to a period for maintaining the storage state of the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. The waiting time B is not particularly limited, but is set to 5 sec, for example. Further, the sustain period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the shutter processing in step S3101 is executed in the normal processing (FIG. 19) as in the sixth embodiment. ing. The process in step S3101 is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 in a state where neither the first opening / closing execution mode nor the second opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the standby time B set in step S3202 is If it has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process.

  Returning to the description of the game control process of FIG. 54A, if it is determined in step S3201 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3203, and the shutter release process for switching the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state is performed. Run. With this process, when a V winning is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode, if a game ball is stored in the accessory device 150, the storage is released and the stored ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. .

  After execution of step S3203 or step S3202, the process proceeds to step S811, and a process of deleting the first opening / closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed.

  Next, the success / failure determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (b) shows only a part different from the success / failure determination process of FIG. 23, and the processing of steps S3301 and S3302 of FIG. 54 (b) is the case where a negative determination is made in step S1104 of FIG. This is executed when the determination result is a normal release result.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the current game result is not a losing result (if it is a normal release result), a shutter setting process is executed in step S3301. In this process, a waiting time A is set until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after winning the operating ports 38 and 39. This waiting time A corresponds to the closing period of the shutter 221 from when the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs until the shutter 221 is opened. The opening of the shutter 221 based on the elapse of the waiting time A is for causing the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 in the first opening / closing execution mode based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39. For this reason, the waiting time A is sufficient if it is shorter than the time obtained by subtracting “the movement time of the storage release ball” from the “elapsed period from the winning to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode”. .5 sec. Further, the sustain period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S3302, a process for clearing the standby time B set in step S3202 is executed. As a result, the opening operation of the shutter 221 scheduled after the standby time B has elapsed is disabled (cancelled). In other words, in the present embodiment, when a winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs during the lapse of the standby time B, the shutter 221 is not opened even when the standby time B elapses.

  In a succeeding step S3303, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The determination standby flag indicates that the remaining ball determination process is waited for after the first opening / closing execution mode ends. If the determination standby flag is stored, processing for deleting the determination standby flag is executed in step S3304. After execution of step S3304, or if it is determined in step S3303 that the determination standby flag is not stored, normal release command setting processing is executed in step S1107 (FIG. 23).

  Next, the remaining sphere determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The process in FIG. 55 is executed in place of the remaining sphere determination process in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processing in the second opening / closing execution mode (the processing after step S2405 in FIG. 38) is the same as that in the first embodiment, and therefore illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the determination standby flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3402 to determine whether it is the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not a V prize has occurred in the first opening / closing execution mode. If the V winning flag is not stored and the V winning is not generated, the process proceeds to step S3404 and the determination waiting time setting process is executed.

  The determination standby time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in this embodiment, is the standby time from the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode. The determination waiting time is the moving time (about 2 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 with respect to the waiting time B (5 sec) until the shutter opening set in step S3202 (FIG. 54A). ) Is set to a predetermined time longer than, for example, 7.5 seconds. In the subsequent step S3405, a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that the remaining ball determination is in a standby state. After execution of step S3405, when a negative determination is made at step S3402 (when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode), or when an affirmative determination is made at step S3403 (when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored) ) Ends the remaining sphere determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process advances to step S3406 to determine whether the determination standby time set in step S3404 has elapsed. If the determination standby time has elapsed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0”, and remaining sphere determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S1503 in FIG. 27), and decremented by 1 each time the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. (Step S1506 in FIG. 27).

  If it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S3408, and the remaining balls are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that game balls remain in the accessory device 150. Stores the flag. After execution of step S3408 or when it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining sphere counter RPC is “0”, the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted in step S3409. . Thereafter, the remaining sphere determination process ends.

  When the normal release result is determined at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, it is determined whether or not the determination standby flag is stored in the previous step S3303 (FIG. 54B) and stored. If so, the determination standby flag is erased in step S3304. When the determination standby flag is deleted, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in FIG. 55, so that the remaining sphere determination in steps S3407 and S3408 is not executed even if the determination standby time has elapsed. In other words, when a winning is made to the operating ports 38 and 39 during the determination standby (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs), the remaining ball determination is not executed (cancelled).

<About the game flow>
Next, a game flow according to the first opening / closing execution mode will be described. In the present embodiment, the game flow between when the shutter opening standby time B elapses without occurrence of the first opening / closing execution mode and when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B elapses. Is different. Here, first, the case where the first opening / closing execution mode does not occur will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. It is assumed that 2 sec is selected for the open standby time.

  When a winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 occurs at timing t81, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the opened state at timing t82 when the standby time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed. The shutter 221 is switched to the closed state again after the open state is maintained for 0.3 sec.

  At timing t83 when the opening waiting time (2 sec) has elapsed from winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 (timing t81), the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the opened state. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. The second distribution member 310 is switched to the non-distribution state again after the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 sec.

  When the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t84, which is immediately after the timing t83, since the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state at this time, the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. It is done. At that time, since the shutter 221 is in a closed state, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide 215 side are stored in the entrance guide 215.

  Thereafter, when the first opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t85, a standby time B (5 sec) for opening the shutter is set. At time t86 when the standby time B has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, and the storage of the game ball is released. As a result, the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192, and passes the V winning sensor 192 after about 2 seconds. However, since the first opening / closing execution mode is completed when the V winning sensor 192 passes, it is not treated as a V winning.

  Next, a case where the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B elapses will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Note that the flow up to the timing t85 when the first opening / closing execution mode ends is the same as that in FIG.

  When the first opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t85, as described above, the standby time B (5 sec) for opening the shutter is set. When a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39 at timing t86 ', which is a timing before the waiting time B has elapsed, the waiting time B is cleared. As a result, the opening of the shutter 221 scheduled at the timing t90 ', which is the elapsed timing of the standby time B, is not executed.

  At timing t87 'at which the standby time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed from timing t86', the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, and the storage of the game ball is released. Further, at timing t88 'when the opening waiting time (2 sec) has elapsed from timing t86', the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the opened state, and the first opening / closing execution mode is started. Here, the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode is 4 sec (the total time of the opening time of 0.5 sec and the waiting time at the end of 3.5 sec). After about 0.5 sec from the start, the V winning sensor 192 is passed. That is, during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode started from the timing t88 ', the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192, and the V winning is generated (timing t89'). Thereby, the shift to the second opening / closing execution mode occurs.

  As described above, when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B elapses, the subsequent first opening / closing execution is performed by the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible to generate a V prize in the mode. That is, if a game ball is won at the operating ports 38 and 39 within the waiting time B, the second opening / closing execution mode is generated, so that the waiting time B shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode. It becomes an easy advantageous period. Thereby, the game after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode can be excited, and it is possible to arouse the desire to continue the game.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, when a game ball wins the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode from timing t83, the game ball reaches the rotating body 201, and There may be a case where a V prize is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, as a state at the time of the end of the first opening / closing execution mode, (a) V winning could be generated, (b) V winning could not be made, but a game ball was placed in the accessory device 150 Three states can be created: (c) V winnings could not be generated or stored. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve interest property compared with the conventional pachinko machine which stays in the two states of whether or not a V prize has occurred.

  Next, the relationship between the opening standby time and the game flow according to the first opening / closing execution mode will be described. First, the flow when the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected will be described with reference to FIG.

  When a winning for the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs at timing t91, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the opened state at timing t92 when the opening standby time (0.5 sec) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. In addition, since the timing t92 is also a timing at which the shutter opening standby time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed since the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is generated, the shutter 221 is released from the closed state at the timing t92. Switch to state.

  As described above, when the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected, the period in which the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the opening state overlap. When the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t93 during the overlap period, the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then the entrance guide unit as it is. It passes through 215 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192. In other words, the route from the entrance guide 215 to the V prize sensor 192 functions as a route through which the game ball won in the accessory device 150 passes directly to the V prize sensor 192.

  The game balls flowing down the route reach the V prize sensor 192 at timing t94, which is about 2 seconds after passing through the entrance guide 215. That is, a V prize is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode in which a prize for the accessory device 150 is generated.

  Next, the flow when the 2 sec open waiting time is selected will be described with reference to FIG.

  When a winning for the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs at timing t95, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the opened state at timing t96 when the opening waiting time (2 sec) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. At that time, the shutter 221 is in the closed state, and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the open state do not overlap. For this reason, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 at the timing t97 immediately after the timing t96 are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then come into contact with the shutter 221 and stop. And stored in the entrance guide 215.

  As described above, there are cases where the game balls distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 receive a V prize and are stored depending on the opening / closing standby time. Among these, in the latter case, if the first opening / closing execution mode does not occur before the standby time B elapses, it is not linked to the V winning, so the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode is not guaranteed. For this reason, the former who wins the V prize as it is is more advantageous for the player. Even if the distribution to the same entrance guide unit 215 is different, the degree of advantage is different, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest in the game development after the distribution, and increase the degree of attention to the game. It becomes possible.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for storing the game balls won in the accessory device 150 is different from the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment, the warp passage 210, the second distribution member 310, the shutter 221 and the V guide passage 260 shown in FIG. 8 are not provided. That is, all the game balls won in the accessory device 150 are guided to the ball distribution unit 185 (see FIG. 9) and flow down either the left or right guide passage 183. The ball distribution unit 185 always guides the game ball that has reached the ball distribution unit 185 to the left guide passage 183, as in the above embodiments.

  In the left guide passage 183, a first distribution member 300 is provided as in the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 8, the first sorting member 300 is driven and controlled by the first sorting drive unit 300 a, so that the first sorting member 300 is in a non-sorted state that constitutes a part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183, and The first sorting member 300 switches to a sorting state in which the rear end of the sorting member 300 rotates downward as a rotation axis and is inclined downward toward the detachment passage 191b.

  When the first sorting member 300 is in a non-sorted state, the game balls distributed to the left side in the guide passage 183 pass on the first sorting member 300 and reach the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b, and the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is a rotating body. Without reaching 201, it is directly guided to the disconnecting passage 191b.

  Returning to the description of the accessory device 150 in FIG. 59, an opening / closing member 400 that opens and closes the release port 182 b is provided on the back side surface of the recess 182. The opening / closing member 400 has a substantially plate shape with a size corresponding to the release port 182 b and is movable along the side surface of the recess 182. The opening / closing member 400 is connected to an opening / closing member drive unit 400a (electromagnetic solenoid). When the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is driven and controlled, the open / close member 182b is opened and the release port 182b is opened. Switch to the closed state, which closes. The opening / closing member drive unit 400 a is electrically controlled with the main control device 81, and is driven and controlled by a drive signal from the main control device 81.

  When the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is not driven (not excited) and the opening / closing member 400 is in the open state, the game balls distributed to the release guide unit 203 by the rotating body 201 are released. It can pass through the opening 182b and is guided to the passage 191b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is driven (becomes an excited state) and the opening / closing member 400 is in the closed state, even if the game ball received by the outlet guide part 203 reaches the outlet 182b. , Cannot pass through the outlet 182b. In this case, the state where the game ball is received by the outlet guide unit 203 is continued, and the game ball is stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

  Nine outlet guides 203 are provided, and each outlet guide 203 is configured to receive one game ball at a time. Therefore, a total of nine game balls can be stored.

  The V winning opening 182a is not provided with an opening / closing mechanism such as the opening / closing member 400 and the opening / closing member driving section 400a. That is, the V winning opening 182a is always open and allows the game ball to pass therethrough. For this reason, the game balls distributed to the V winning opening guide unit 204 are guided to the V winning path 191a through the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates. In other words, the game ball received by the V winning opening guide 204 is not stored after reaching the V winning opening 182a, and is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150.

  Next, portions of the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

  As already described, since the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment does not include the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221, the present embodiment does not require processing related to the drive control. For this reason, for example, a process for driving and controlling the second sorting member 310 using the second sorting pattern table (FIG. 34) (step S1204 in FIG. 24) and a process for driving and controlling the shutter 221 (FIG. 24). Step S1205, step S2112 in FIG. 35, etc.) are omitted, and these processes are not executed.

  The setting process for each round according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 (a) shows only the parts different from the setting processing for each round in FIG. 30, and the processing in steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 60 (a) is performed after the execution of step S1804 in FIG. Is called. Note that the setting process for each round is executed at the start of the round game (see step S1705 in FIG. 29).

  After executing the corresponding round pattern setting process (opening / closing pattern setting process for each round) in step S1804, the opening / closing member 400 setting process is executed in step S3701. This process sets the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 in each round.

  Here, the process of step S3701 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the process of step S3701, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “15”. Since the value of the first round counter RC1 is “15” means the second round game (the first round in the second opening / closing execution mode) (see step S1608 in FIG. 28), in step S3801, Therefore, it is determined whether or not the round game is the second round.

  When it is determined that the value of the first round counter RC1 is “15”, that is, in the case of the second round game, the process proceeds to step S3802, and the closed state is maintained throughout the second round game. The operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so as to be maintained. That is, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 in the round game of the second round are stored in the exit guide unit 203 until the round game of the second round is completed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “15”, the process proceeds to step S3803, and whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “3” or more and “14” or less. Determine whether. That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is any one from the third round to the fourteenth round.

  When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “3” or more and “14” or less, in step S3804, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the round game, a predetermined release period is set. The operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the opening / closing member 400 is in an open state and then closed until the round game ends. For this reason, in the round games from the 3rd round to the 14th round, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the exit guide unit 203 until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the round game. Then, the storage state is released by switching the open / close member 400 to the open state. Then, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the closed state again, and the game balls distributed to the outlet guide part 203 are stored in the outlet guide part 203 during the remaining period of the round game.

  The predetermined period for maintaining the closed state is arbitrary as long as it is shorter than the execution period of the round game for one round, but is set to 5 sec in this embodiment, for example. On the other hand, the opening period for maintaining the opening state is also arbitrary, but when all the game balls stored in the outlet guide unit 203 are discharged, the period is longer than the period in which the rotating body 201 makes one round. There is a need. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the opened state, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 is increased so as to make one round in 1 sec, and the above opening period is set to 1.5 sec.

  If it is determined in step S3803 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not less than “3” and not less than “14”, the process proceeds to step S3805, and whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “2”. That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is the 15th round (the round game immediately before the last round).

  When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “2”, in a step S3806, after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the round game, it is in the open state for a predetermined open period, Thereafter, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the open state is maintained until the end of the round game. For this reason, in the round game of the 15th round, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the exit guide unit 203 until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game, The storage state is released by switching the opening / closing member 400 to the open state. After that, since the released state continues until the end of the round game, the game ball is not stored even if the game ball is distributed to the exit guide unit 203. In addition, although the said predetermined period in this step is arbitrary, in this Embodiment, it is set as the same length as the said predetermined period of step S3804.

  If it is determined in step S3806 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “2”, it means that the round game to be executed is the 16th round (final round). In this case, in step S3807, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so as to maintain the open state throughout the 16th round game. In other words, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide unit 203 in the 16th round game are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 as the rotating body 201 rotates. After executing the processes of steps S3802, S3804, S3806, and S3807, the setting process of the opening / closing member 400 is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for each round in FIG. 60A, after executing the process of step S3701, the rotating body setting process is executed in step S3702. As already described, the present embodiment is configured to rotate the rotating body 201 at a high speed in accordance with the switching of the opening / closing member 400 to the open state, and this step performs the setting process. In this embodiment, since the setting process for the rotating body is performed for each round, step S1609 (the setting process for the rotating body) in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 28 is not executed.

  In step S3702, whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is “2” or more and “14” or less (whether or not the round game to be executed is any of the 23rd to 15th rounds). If the determination is affirmative and an affirmative determination is made, the operating mode of the rotating body 201 is such that high-speed rotation is performed over a high-speed rotation period (1 sec) after the elapse of a predetermined period (the same period as the predetermined period in step S3804). Set.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made by the above determination, that is, when the round game to be executed is the second round or the 16th round, the normal rotation speed (one round in 5 seconds) is maintained throughout the round game. Next, the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set. After execution of step S3702, step S1805 (a process of setting the upper limit winning number to the accessory device 150) in FIG. 30 is executed.

  Next, the round update process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). 61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate only the parts different from the round update process of FIG. The process of step S3901 of FIG. 61A is performed after execution of step S2206 of FIG. 36, and the process of step S3902 of FIG. 61B is performed after execution of step S2209 of FIG. In the round update process, in the round game, when the number of winnings for the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number (9), or the opening number of the opening / closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number (19). (See step S1712 in FIG. 29).

  First, the closing setting process of the opening / closing member 400 in step S3901 in FIG. This process sets the operation mode of the opening and closing member 400 in the closing period (round interval) between rounds. In step S3901, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the opening / closing member 400 is in the closed state over the entire closing period. For this reason, when the game ball is stored in the exit guide unit 203 at the end of the previous round, the stored state is maintained even after the transition to the closed period, and the state is directly taken over to the next round. After execution of step S3901, the process proceeds to step S2207 (round update command setting process) in FIG.

  Next, the opening setting process of the opening / closing member 400 in step S3902 of FIG. 61 (b) will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 during the ending period. In step S3902, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the opening / closing member 400 is in an open state throughout the ending period. For this reason, even if game balls are stored in the outlet guide part 203 at the end of the previous round, these stored balls are discharged outside the accessory device 150 during the ending period. After execution of step S3902, the process proceeds to step S2210 (ending command setting process) in FIG.

  Next, the process for the in-object operating unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 (c) shows only a part different from the processing for the in-compartment operation unit in FIG. 26, and the processing in steps S4101 and S4102 in FIG. 61 (c) is performed in steps S1403 to S1406 in FIG. Instead, it is executed. It should be noted that the in-object operation unit process is executed in step S1615 of the gaming state transition process of FIG.

  In the process for the action part in the accessory, when a negative determination is made in step S1401 (determination process of whether or not it is the control timing of the first distribution member 300), or in step S1402 (drive control process of the first distribution member 300) In step S4101, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing (control timing) of the opening / closing member 400. If it is the displacement timing, an opening / closing control process is executed in step S4102. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is grasped, and when it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the opening / closing member 400 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is not in the driving state, the driving is started to displace the opening / closing member 400 from the open state to the closed state. When a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after execution of step S4102, the process proceeds to step S1407 (rotating body control processing).

<About the game flow>
Next, a game flow according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining a game flow in the second opening / closing execution mode. Here, a description will be given by taking the third and fourth round games as examples. The description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the continuous variation mode, and that the V round is generated at any timing of the third round and the fourth round is performed.

  At timing t102 when 5 seconds have elapsed from the timing t101 when the third round game is started, the opening / closing member 400 is switched from the closed state to the opened state, and the release port 182b is opened. This state is maintained until timing t103 after 1.5 seconds. Moreover, as already demonstrated, between timing t102-t103, the rotary body 201 rotates at high speed so that it may make one round in 1 second.

  For this reason, the game balls stored in the outlet guide part 203 at the timing t102 are guided to the outlet 182b until the timing t103, and discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150. As a result, the state of the rotator 201 at the timing t103 is a state in which the game balls are not received by all nine exit guides 203 as shown in FIG. The game ball can be accepted.

  At timing t103, the opening / closing member 400 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the release port 182b is closed. Thereby, in the rotating body 201, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide part 203 can be stored. Such a state continues until timing t106 when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round. For this reason, when a game ball is stored in the exit guide 203 at the timing t104 when the third round ends, it is taken over also at the timing t105 when the fourth round starts.

  At timing t104, for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, when game balls are stored in the four outlet guides 203, the outlet guides 203 are blocked by the stored balls. It becomes impossible to accept new game balls. For this reason, at the timing t105 when the fourth round is started, the total number of the ball guide units 202 that can receive the game ball is six including the V winning opening guide unit 204. As a result, the V winning rate at the start of the fourth round (the probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body 201 is distributed to the V winning opening guide 204) is 1/6.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), for example, most of the game balls won in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the release port 182b by the first distribution member 300, and the release port for storing the game balls is stored. When the number of the guide units 203 is one, the total number of the ball guide units 202 that can accept the game ball is nine at the timing t105 when the fourth round is started. In this case, the V winning rate is 1/9, and the V winning rate is lower than in the case of FIG.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage at the start of the fourth round changes depending on the number of game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 after the timing t103 of the third round. For this reason, the period A from the timing t103 to the time t104 is a period for increasing the number of the exit guides 203 in which the game balls are stored so as to advantageously start the fourth round.

  The period B from the timing t105 when the fourth round is started to the timing t106 when the opening and closing member 400 is switched to the open state is a period aiming for the V prize while receiving the benefits of the storage accumulated in the period A. Also in the period B, if the game balls are distributed to the vacant exit guide unit 203, the game balls are stored in the guide unit 203. As a result, the total number of ball guides 202 that can receive game balls is further reduced, and the proportion occupied by the V winning opening guide 204 is higher. For this reason, in the period B, the closer to the timing t106 at which the period ends, the higher the V winning rate and the easier it is to generate a V prize.

  If the V winning is oversimplified, the significance of providing the continuous variation mode is lost, and the attractiveness of the V winning is reduced. For this reason, it may be desirable that the V prize is difficult to some extent. As countermeasures, for example, the number of the exit guides 203 in the rotating body 201 is increased, or a game ball is accepted by the one exit guide 203. It is possible to increase the number. However, in these cases, the structure of the rotating body 201 and the outlet guide 203 is complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden of the accessory design. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls heading to the rotating body 201 is reduced by the first distribution member 300, so that the number of the outlet guides 203 and the game to the one outlet guide part 203 are reduced. The number of balls accepted can be reduced. This makes it possible to maintain a certain degree of V prize difficulty while simplifying the configuration of the rotating body 201 and the outlet guide portion 203.

  When the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state at the timing t106, the state is maintained for 1.5 seconds. Thereby, the storage of the game balls is released, and the state of the rotator 201 becomes a state in which no game balls are received in all nine exit guides 203 as shown in FIG.

  In that case, it is good also as a structure which performs notification which suggests the timing of the cancellation | release of storage, and the period to the said timing in the symbol display apparatus 51, the display light emission part 63, the speaker part 64 grade | etc.,. For example, when the symbol display device 51 is used for notification, specific display may be performed at the timing of releasing the storage, or the above period may be displayed at the start of the round, the round interval immediately before it, or the predetermined timing after the start of the round. Further, for example, a change in the remaining time may be suggested by a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like, or a notification indicating the elapsed time from the start of the round may be performed. Control regarding these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51 and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

  At timing t107 when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from timing t106, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t108 at which the fourth round ends. For this reason, the timing t107 to t108 is a period A for increasing the number of the outlet guides 203 in which the game balls are stored, so that the fifth round is advantageous, similarly to the timing t103 to t104.

  After that, the round game of the fifth round is performed in the same manner as in the case of the fourth round, and thereafter, the first half of the round game is a period B in which the benefit of the previous round is received, and the second half is reserved for the next round. The round game that becomes the period A to increase is repeated until the 14th round.

  Incidentally, if no V prize is generated in the period B from the timing t105 to t106, the V prize must be aimed at the period A from the timing t107 to t108. As described above, since the previous storage is reset at the timing t107, it is assumed that the V winning rate in the period A is lower than that in the period B. In other words, by setting the storage release timing in the middle of a round game, it is possible to switch from a state where it is easy to win a V in a round game to a state where it is difficult to win a V. Thus, since the period in which the V prize was preferentially limited to the middle of the round game, the round game can be advanced under the tension that the preferential period may end without the V prize being generated, Interest is improved.

  By the way, in order to establish the continuation condition in the round game, it is sufficient for the game ball to pass the V winning sensor 192 once, and it is not necessary to pass it repeatedly. Further, unlike the exit guide part 203, the V winning opening guide part 204 does not store game balls. For this reason, even if the game balls are distributed again to the V winning opening guide 204 after the occurrence of the V winning, the player has no more reward than the game balls can be paid out. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide unit 203 after the V winning is generated, there is an advantage that the next round game becomes advantageous because the game balls are not paid out but are stored.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the V prize opening guide unit 204 is more advantageous than the exit guide part 203 before the occurrence of the V prize, whereas the V prize opening guide part 204 is advantageous after the occurrence of the V prize. The release guide 203 is advantageous. That is, the advantageous relationship is reversed with the occurrence of the V prize winning as a boundary, and it is possible to provide a novel gameability that has not existed before. Also, with this configuration, two games, a game that aims to be distributed to the V prize opening guide unit 204 and a game that aims to be distributed to the outage guide unit 203, can be realized in one round game. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve interest property compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the former is only secured.

  Next, the flow of the second round game will be described. In the second opening / closing execution mode, the round game of the second round, which is the first round, cannot be started in an advantageous state because there is no carry-over (storage) of game balls from the previous round game. Therefore, in the second round, unlike the third to fourteenth rounds, the opening / closing member 400 is not switched to an open state in the middle of the round game, and the storage is not released. For this reason, in the second round game, it is possible to store the game balls in the outlet guide unit 203 using the entire round game. As a result, the V winning rate in the second round is increased, and the second opening / closing execution mode is prevented from ending early. Note that the game balls stored in the second round are taken over as they are in the third round, so that the game can be advanced particularly advantageously in the period B of the third round.

  Next, the flow of the 15th and 16th round games will be described. As already described, in the fifteenth round, although the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state during the round game, the open state is maintained until the end of the round without returning to the closed state. For this reason, in the fifteenth round, when the first half period B ends, the game balls are not stored thereafter. In the 16th round, since the opening / closing member 400 is maintained in the open state throughout the round game, no accumulation occurs throughout the round game.

  This is because the upper limit round in the second opening / closing execution mode is set to 16 rounds, so even if a V prize is generated in the 16th round, the next round is not carried out, the second half of the 15th round and the 16th round This is because it is not meaningful to store game balls. In addition, if it remains in the accessory device 150 even after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, it becomes difficult to ensure the timing of the remaining ball determination, but the above configuration ensures the timing of the remaining ball determination. It becomes easy to do.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the remaining sphere determination is performed at the end of ending. In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 400 is in an open state during the ending period. As a result, not only when the round game has reached the 16th round, but also when the ending ends (when the remaining ball determination is executed) even when the round game ends (for example, the fifth round) The game balls in 150 can be completely discharged, and the remaining ball determination can be performed appropriately.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the accessory device 150, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide unit 203 can be stored, and the V winning rate of the next round game is increased by the stored balls. Thereby, it becomes possible to play a game by linking the previous and subsequent round games, and it is possible to improve the interest as compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the game is independent for each round game.

  Furthermore, the following effect is also expected by using the outlet guide part 203 as a storage part. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to the receiving part for detachment, the player feels unhappy, but in this embodiment, when the game sphere is distributed to the release guide part 203, the player has a merit. Therefore, the outlet guide part 203 is recognized as a useful receiving part. Thereby, it is possible to realize a gameability that a player can enjoy regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the V prize opening guide unit 204 or the exit guide unit 203, and it is possible to suitably increase the game motivation. In addition, the exit guide unit 203, which has been recognized only as disadvantageous in the past, functions as a receiving unit that increases the degree of advantage, so it is possible to give unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player become.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300, and the second distribution member 310 are provided as various distribution means, but the configuration for distributing the game balls is arbitrary. Moreover, it is not limited to a dynamic distribution structure, and a static distribution structure such as a distribution passage or a croon may be used.

  (2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game balls stored in the entrance guide unit 215 or the outlet guide unit 203 are configured to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but may be configured to be invisible. In this case, the presence or absence of storage is not clear from the viewpoint of the player, and it is possible to add the fun of guessing this.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, a game ball that won a prize in the accessory device 150 in one specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, or second opening / closing execution mode) won V prize in the next specific game. Although it is configured to pass through the sensor 192, it is not limited to this. For example, the game ball may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the next specific game as viewed from the specific game in which the game ball has won the accessory device 150. The point is that the winning ball in the previous specific game may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific game executed after that.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls entered into the accessory device 150 and the number of balls discharged from the accessory device 150 are managed by one counter (residual ball counter RPC). A first counter for grasping the number of balls and a second counter for grasping the number of balls discharged may be provided, and the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged may be managed separately. In this case, the remaining sphere determination can be made based on determining whether the values of the first counter and the second counter match.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, an end waiting time is provided in each round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, but this is not provided, or a game in which the end waiting time is awarded to the accessory device 150. The time until the ball is discharged from the accessory device 150 may be shorter. With these configurations, game balls other than the game balls stored in the entrance guide unit 215 or the exit guide unit 203 can be carried over to the next round. However, even if the final winning ball in the round game (the gaming ball won immediately before closing the accessory device 150) passes the V winning sensor 192, the passing is after the end of the round game, and the V winning is invalidated. Considering that a situation may occur, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

  Further, in the configuration in which the waiting time at the end is provided, the waiting time at the end may be set only when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number. According to this configuration, for example, when the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is released reaches the upper limit opening number (provided that the maximum number of winnings has not been reached at the same time), the round game is quickly ended. Yes, the waiting time until the next round game can be shortened.

  Further, in the configuration in which the waiting time at the end is provided, whether or not a V winning has occurred (or whether or not a continuation condition is satisfied) when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number. When the V prize has already occurred, the waiting time at the end may not be provided (the waiting time at the end is set to 0 sec). This is because when the V winning has already occurred, it is not meaningful to wait for the final winning ball to pass V or not.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, when the V winning is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode, the first opening / closing execution mode may be terminated based on the occurrence of the V winning. Thereby, the second opening / closing execution mode can be started without waiting for the end-time waiting time to elapse, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted. In this case, the remaining ball determination may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. At that time, by setting the predetermined period to be shorter than the opening period of the second opening / closing execution mode, the remaining sphere determination can be completed during the opening, and the interference with the remaining sphere determination with respect to the second opening / closing execution mode is reduced. Can be suppressed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not perform the remaining ball determination with respect to the 1st opening / closing execution mode in which V prize-winning generate | occur | produced, and performs collectively with the 2nd opening / closing execution mode.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, on the basis of winning in the operation ports 38 and 39, at least one of the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 51 is configured to display the symbols in a variable manner, in other words, lottery processing. It is good also as a structure which performs the game time which starts a variable display based on what is performed, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the said lottery process, and complete | finishes a variable display once. In this case, after the variable display is started based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39, the variable display is performed over the same period as the opening standby time, and then the pattern is stopped and displayed. The pattern display mode (stop display result) in the case of stop display may correspond to the result of the lottery process (see FIG. 12) performed based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, it is assumed that the hold information is acquired based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (four each). Although described, the configuration may be such that the hold information is not stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

  (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the description has been given by taking as an example a configuration in which the number of hold information of the hold information based on winning to each of the operation ports 38 and 39 is stored with the upper limit being four, but less than three. There may be five or more, and it is good also as a structure from which the upper limit memory | storage number of the hold | maintenance information based on the winning to each operating port 38 and 39 differs.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the number of hold information is displayed by the hold light emitting units 54 to 56, but may be configured to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the top of the accessory device 150, and the player operates the game ball around the accessory device 150, such as winning a prize to the accessory device 150 and then winning a V prize. It is considered that the aspect is highly interested, and if the number of pending information is displayed in a place close to such a place of interest (that is, the display screen G), it will naturally enter the field of view. it is conceivable that. In this way, it is possible to consolidate information and make it easy to understand the game, as compared to a configuration in which different notifications are made using various locations. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the type is notified on the display screen G. When the display screen G is configured to notify the reserved number, the opening / closing execution mode is When the type is notified, the display of the information on the reserved number is deleted, or the type of the opening / closing execution mode is notified while the information on the reserved number remains. In the former case, there is a disadvantage that it is impossible to confirm the number of hold information when the notification of the type of opening / closing execution mode is performed, and in the latter case, the production area becomes small. Thus, there may be a disadvantage that the notification itself of the type of opening / closing execution mode may be sober. Therefore, for example, if the display unit G has the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 and displays the number of hold information on the display screen G, even if the display of the number of hold information on the display screen G is deleted, Can be confirmed by the holding light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in accordance with the timing.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, as the hold information, the big hit type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning the operating ports 38, 39, and the type of the opening / closing execution mode (hit type) is used using the big hit type counter C2. However, it is also possible to obtain a counter for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode at the time of winning a V and determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode based on the counter. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter used at the time of winning a V when winning the operating ports 38 and 39 even though no V winning has occurred, and the processing configuration is simplified. Can be achieved. However, for example, when determining the opening / closing pattern, the configuration reflects the type of opening / closing execution mode at the time of V winning, in detail, for example, if 16R big win, V winning rate is increased / decreased, if 8R big hit In the case of a configuration such as increasing / decreasing the V winning rate, a configuration in which a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information is preferable. In addition, in the opening / closing control execution or in the pre-read notification, a configuration for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of winning V at the opening / closing control corresponding to the hold information (for example, “If this is a win, 16R jackpot !!”) In the display and the like, it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the mode of support by the electric utility 39a is set so as not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, when compared in a situation where a game ball is continuously launched in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the second working port 39 is released per unit period. The low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 39a is in the open state when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing period (i.e., after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed, compared to the low frequency support mode (that is, The one display continuation period in the accessory display 44 is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 is in an open state is also high, and the probability of V winning (occurrence of jackpot) is also high.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the electric power release state per unit period as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period that is secured after the next drawing of the electric utility product is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average period of the reservation period and increasing the winning probability. .

  Note that, in the case of the configuration in which the level of the support state by the electric utility 39a is not provided as in the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 itself are not provided may be employed. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

  (13) In each of the above-described embodiments, based on the occurrence of the V prize for the accessory device 150, the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the prize for the accessory device occurs. However, the second opening / closing execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable pitching device capable of shifting between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter is provided separately from the accessory device 150. The main control device 81 is configured to control the variable pitching device to be in an open state based on the occurrence of a V prize to the accessory device.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are always V-winned, but a part of them is configured to win the off-side. Also good.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has won a prize device 150 is discharged to the outside of the bonus device by the V winning path 191a or the detaching path 191b, and the discharged game ball is not shown. Although it was set as the structure discharged | emitted outside the pachinko machine 10 via a channel | path, it is good also as a structure discharged | emitted to a game area as the exterior of an accessory device.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is restored from the game stop state based on the abnormality detection without operating the RAM erasing switch 98a, the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are canceled. It is good also as a structure which does not. In this case, a release switch for releasing the abnormality detection state and the game stop state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main controller 81 when the staff of the game hall returns to the power source while operating the release switch. May be configured to cancel the abnormality detection state and the game stop state. Accordingly, when the power is restored by operating only the power switch 92b, the game stop state can be continued even after the power is restored.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, the winning ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the winning sensor 192. However, the gaming ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the off sensor 193. It is good also as a structure which pays out a prize ball based on it. However, in consideration of a time lag from when a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs until a prize ball is paid out, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the accessory device 150 includes the opening / closing accessory 168. However, the opening / closing accessory 168 may be provided without entering the opening / closing accessory 168. The accessory device in this case is, for example, “a specific area provided in a game area where a game ball can enter” or “a specific area provided in a game area and partitioned so that a game ball can enter”. And so on.

  (19) Each of the above embodiments can be applied to the following configuration. For example, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a lottery based on winning in one of the operating ports 38, 39 causes a transition to an opening / closing execution mode (so-called jackpot game) (a jackpot result)) Based on the low probability mode in which the probability of becoming a lottery result that causes the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is a predetermined probability, as the lottery mode of the lottery processing, In a gaming machine having a high probability mode in which the lottery result is higher than the low probability mode, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 182a when the variable pitching device is opened during the opening / closing execution mode (V The game state after the opening / closing execution mode ends may shift to the high probability mode (so-called V-probability machine). Further, the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments corresponds to a so-called game machine called a so-called two-type pachinko machine, but the configuration of each embodiment is applied to a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type game machine. May be.

  (20) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp passage 210 is disposed behind the rotating body 201, but may be disposed on the side or front of the rotating body 201. However, if it is arranged on the side, the width dimension of the accessory device 150 tends to increase, which leads to a narrowing of the flow area of the game ball outside the accessory device. Considering this point, it is preferable to arrange in the front or the rear utilizing the space in the front-rear direction. However, since the visibility of the rotator 201 that is highly interested by the player is hindered if it is arranged in the front, it is preferably arranged in the rear as in the above embodiment. In this case, it is not always necessary to be directly behind, and may be obliquely rearward.

  (21) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp passage 210 is provided, and the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 is guided to the V prize sensor 192 without passing through the rotating body 201. However, it is good also as a structure which guides the game ball stored in the accessory apparatus 150 to the rotary body 201. FIG. In this case, the rotating body 201 is stopped at a predetermined position (for example, a position where the V winning opening guide portion 204 faces the deriving portion 186) where the storage releasing ball can be distributed to the V winning opening guide portion 204 in correspondence with the timing of releasing the storage. If it is set as the structure made to do, the V winning percentage of a storage cancellation | release ball | bowl can be stabilized.

  However, since it becomes necessary to control the movement of the rotator 201 in consideration of both the game sphere that goes to the rotator 201 without being stored and the game sphere that goes to the rotator 201 through storage, the control becomes complicated, There is a risk that the processing load of the main control device 81 increases. In addition, considering that there is a case where a game ball that goes to the rotating body 201 without being stored and a game ball that goes to the rotating body 201 through storage interfere with each other, one of the V balls may be obstructed. It is preferable that the route toward the V winning sensor 192 is independent. Considering these, it is preferable to adopt the above embodiment.

  Moreover, when it is set as the structure which guides the game ball stored in the accessory apparatus 150 to the rotary body 201, it is good also as a structure which rotates the rotary body 201 as usual. In this case, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to complicated operation control. However, the number of game balls heading to the rotating body 201 is increased by the amount of storage, and it does not stand out easily for winning a V prize. As a result, the attractiveness of storage is reduced, and the willingness to aim at storage is reduced. From this point of view, the above embodiment is preferable.

  (22) In the first to sixth embodiments, the game ball is stored in a stopped state, but the game ball may be stored while being moved. For example, it is possible to provide a circulation path that circulates game balls that have entered the accessory device 150 without being discharged from the accessory apparatus 150, and to store the game balls by moving through the circulation path. In this case, a derivation unit capable of deriving the game ball moving in the circulation path to the V prize sensor 192, a distribution means for distributing the game balls in the circulation path to the deriving unit side, and a side to continuously move the circulation path; It is good to provide. By controlling the distribution timing of the distribution means (the timing of distribution to the derivation unit), the storage can be released at an appropriate timing.

  (23) In the first to sixth embodiments, the period from when the storage ball is released to when the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is a fixed period (about 2 sec). However, it may be configured to diversify the above period (a configuration in which a difference occurs in the passing timing of the V winning sensor 192 even if the storage release timing is the same).

  For example, as the above period, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are generated. In the first period, the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game, and the second period In the period, it can be configured that the V winning sensor 192 is passed after the end of the next round game. When the storage-released ball passes the V winning sensor 192 after the next round game ends, it may be configured to pass the V winning sensor 192 at a round interval between successive round games. It may be configured to pass the winning sensor 192. In the former case, the V winning by the storage release ball does not occur, and in the latter case, the execution of the next round is confirmed. In the first period, the storage release ball may pass the V winning sensor 192 before the start of the next round game, and may pass the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game in the second period. . In these cases, since subsequent game development by the storage release ball is randomized, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball released from the storage.

  As a configuration for diversifying the period until the storage release ball reaches the V prize sensor 192, it is preferable to provide a period variable means such as a croon between the storage unit and the V prize sensor 192. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with a croon and provides the some ball path from which the path length to V winning sensor 192 differs, and the distribution means which distributes the game ball by which storage cancellation | release was carried out to the said some ball path.

  (24) In the first to sixth embodiments, the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150 by storing it, but it is not necessarily required to be stored. For example, by providing a moving path that takes a long time to reach the V winning sensor 192 and moving in the moving path, a game ball won in the accessory device 150 in the previous specific game (round game or the like) can be obtained. It is good also as a structure which passes V winning prize sensor 192 by a specific game after.

  (25) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, one game ball can be stored. However, a plurality of game balls may be stored.

  (26) In the first embodiment, the storage is released at the end of the round game. However, the storage may be released before the end of the round game. Further, the storage may be released after the next round game is started, or the storage may be released during the closing time (round interval) between the rounds. In short, it is sufficient that the game ball won in the previous round game can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the later round game, and the release timing of the storage is arbitrary. However, if it is configured to release the storage after the next round game is started, the player not only releases the storage but also whether the game ball wins the accessory device 150 or whether the winning ball wins V. There is a need to be careful and it becomes hectic. For this reason, it is easy to overlook the cancellation of storage, and in light of this point, it is preferable to cancel the storage at a round interval at the end or end of the previous round game where the game settles down.

  (27) In the first embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the second sorting member 310 is maintained in the non-sorted state, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance guide 215 (warp passage 210) side. However, the second distribution member 310 may be switched between a distributed state and a non-distributed state, and the game balls may be distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. In this case, if the shutter 221 is further opened, the game ball passes through the entrance guide 215 and the warp passage 210 can be used as a straight V route.

  (28) In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not a game ball can be stored during a round game differs depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and jackpot B are provided, and in the case of jackpot A, it is possible to store game balls during a round game, and in the case of jackpot B, it is impossible to do so. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the round and number of rounds in which the game ball can be stored differ depending on the type of jackpot.

  (29) In the second embodiment, the second sorting member 310 is maintained in an unsorted state in the fifth round, the tenth round, and the sixteenth round so that winning balls are not stored. However, the second sorting member 310 may be driven to switch between the sorted state and the non-sorted state while the shutter 221 is maintained in the open state. In this case, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 by the second distribution member 310 pass through the V prize sensor 192 via the warp passage 210 without being stored in the entrance guide unit 215. . That is, the distributed game balls are not carried over to the next round game, and pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which a winning occurs.

  (30) In the second embodiment, in place of or in addition to the fifth round, the tenth round, and the 16th round, the previous round (the 15th round) of the upper limit round (the 16th round) cannot be stored. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining sphere determination is performed in response to the end of the previous round. Even if a game ball wins a V in the upper limit round, the next round will not be executed, and the advantage of storing the game ball in the previous round is poor. It is possible to execute the remaining ball determination in the middle of the big hit without losing.

  (31) In the third embodiment, the execution timing of the remaining ball determination is set based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game, but may be set based on the elapsed time from the release timing of storage. . In this case, if the period from the cancellation of the storage to the execution of the remaining ball determination is made longer than the period until the storage cancellation sphere reaches the V winning sensor 192, the storage cancellation sphere is removed from the accessory device 150. The remaining sphere determination can be performed after being discharged.

  (32) The following configuration may be used instead of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the remaining ball determination for each round is possible, but the winning to the accessory device 150 is limited by the short opening mode, so that it is difficult for the player to win. There is a risk of giving. Therefore, first, the short open mode is not executed. Then, the second staying means capable of retaining the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 in the accessory device 150, and the second stay releasing means for releasing the stay are provided as an entrance guide 215 and Provided separately from the shutter 221, the second game is configured such that the round game is started in a state where the game ball can stay in the second staying means, and the stay is released after a predetermined period has elapsed. Further, the entrance sensor 179 is provided on the downstream side of the second staying means so that the game balls retained by the second staying means are not counted for winning (not detected by the entrance sensor 179). In this case, if the configuration is such that “passing of the stored release ball through the V winning sensor 192 and remaining ball determination (remaining ball determination is after V winning of the stored release ball)” are performed within the predetermined period, to the accessory device 150. The remaining ball counter RPC is updated based on the winning of the game ball after the execution of the remaining ball determination. That is, it is possible to allow winnings to the accessory device 150 while avoiding interference with the remaining ball determination, and to make the player feel difficult to win while allowing the remaining ball determination for each round. Can be suppressed.

  In the above configuration, the second staying means may be provided on the upstream side of the inlet guide 215 and the shutter 221 or on the downstream side. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a short open aspect in the said structure. In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a mismatch between the number of winnings and the number of dischargings when a winning occurs in a short opening mode.

  (33) In the fourth embodiment, the storage is canceled based on the fact that the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches a specific number (eight), but based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game. It is good also as a structure to cancel | release. In this case, it is possible to deal with the case where the winning to the accessory device 150 does not occur easily and the round game is ended while the number of winning is less than the specific number. In the fourth embodiment, the specific number is eight (one less than the maximum number of winning prizes), but the specific number is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit winning number may be the specific number. .

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, the special storage release is performed only in the round game of the second round, but may be configured in a round game other than the second round. In this case, it may be performed in all rounds or may be configured in some rounds. In the latter case, after determining in advance the round to be executed for the special storage release, when executing the second opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the round game is the predetermined round. When the determination is made, the operation of the shutter 221 may be controlled so that special storage cancellation is performed. Thereby, some rounds can be preferentially treated. In this case, different notifications may be performed when a round with such preferential treatment is performed and when a round other than that is performed, or only the former may be configured as a specific notification. Such notification may be performed as a display effect by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as a sound effect by the speaker unit 64.

  (35) In the fifth embodiment, when a specific round is executed, the game ball can be stored for a predetermined period after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the specific round is not executed. In addition, it may be configured such that it is impossible to store the game ball after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a privilege when the round game is continued up to a specific round, it is possible to provide a chance to enter the second open / close execution mode. Thereby, the game goal of continuing until the specific round in the second opening / closing execution mode is added, and the fun of the second opening / closing execution mode can be enhanced. The specific round is not particularly limited, but is preferably less than the upper limit round (16 rounds) (for example, 10 rounds). In this case, it is possible for the player to set the game target step by step so as to continue at least to the specific round, and preferably to the upper limit round.

  In addition, when a specific round is executed, it becomes impossible to store game balls after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and when the specific round is not executed, a predetermined period after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which can store a game ball over this. In this case, as a remedy when the second opening / closing execution mode is completed with a small number of rounds, it is possible to provide a chance to enter the second opening / closing execution mode. Although the specific round in this case is also arbitrary, in order to suppress the intentional end in the middle round, it is preferable to set it as about 4 rounds, for example.

  Note that the storage availability can be switched by, for example, controlling the operation mode of the shutter 221 during the ending period. Specifically, when storing is possible, the shutter 221 is closed during the ending period, and when storing is impossible, the shutter 221 may be opened during the ending period.

  (36) In the fifth embodiment described above, whether or not the game balls can be stored after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode may be different depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and jackpot B are provided, and in the case of jackpot A, the above storage can be performed, and in the case of jackpot B, the above storage cannot be performed.

  In this case, different notifications may be performed when the jackpot A is executed and when the jackpot B is executed, or the specific notification may be configured only for the former. Such notification may be performed as a display effect by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as a sound effect by the speaker unit 64. Note that when the jackpot type is distributed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, which jackpot type will be determined at the time of winning a prize to the operating ports 38, 39 or when the suspension is spent. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the notification may be performed not only in the second opening / closing execution mode but also in the first opening / closing execution mode and the opening waiting time thereof.

  (37) In the fifth embodiment, when there is a hold at a specific timing in the previous second opening / closing execution mode, the hold information that is held and the open standby time corresponding to the hold information are pre-read ( The pending hold information and the corresponding open waiting time are specified at a timing before the hold information is subject to lottery processing such as determination of success or failure), and the notification is made based on the prefetched result. Good. For example, when a 2.5-second opening waiting time in which a villa is expected is prefetched, a special notification (for example, “big hit” is performed at a predetermined timing that is one of the timings until the second opening / closing execution mode ends. "If there is a ball stock at the end of the game, a chance to play a villa!").

  In this case, before the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, the player can grasp that it is advantageous that there is storage at the end, and that the possibility of a villa is high. The willingness to end the 2 open / close execution mode increases. Thereby, the importance of the last round can be increased and the second opening / closing execution mode can be enjoyed until the end. In addition, since prefetching is performed due to the holding information, it is possible to increase the willingness to cause the holding.

  In addition, when the open waiting time of 0.5 sec with a low likelihood of consecutive resorts is prefetched, a notification different from the special notification may be performed, or a configuration in which notification is not particularly performed may be employed. Further, the pre-reading of the hold information may be performed by the main control device 81 or may be performed by a control device (such as the effect control device 82) other than the main control device 81.

  (38) In the fifth embodiment, the period from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode to the release of storage is standardized, but one period is selected from a plurality of periods having different lengths. By doing so, you may diversify the period until storage cancellation. For example, the lottery process may be executed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the period may be determined based on the result. When the period until the release of storage is diversified, it becomes difficult to predict whether the second opening / closing execution mode will be extended, so that the tension until the release of storage actually increases and the interest is improved. In addition, by randomizing the release timing of storage, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming for winning a prize to the operation ports 38 and 39 in accordance with the release timing (when there is no holding information at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode) ), It becomes easier to ensure the fairness of the game.

  The said structure WHEREIN: It is good also as a structure which performs the predetermined alert | report which suggests the period until storage cancellation | release at specific timing (for example, at the time of completion | finish of 2nd opening / closing execution mode). In this case, since the release timing of the storage can be predicted, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the first opening / closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the release of storage. The predetermined notification may not be performed. In this case, since the release timing of the storage becomes difficult to predict, it is expected that the stored ball will continue to be watched until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In the above configuration, when there is hold information at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, a notification is made based on the relationship between the open standby time corresponding to the hold information and the period until the selected storage release. It is good. For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second opening / closing execution mode is linked or highly likely (when the storage release ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 or easily passes through during the first opening / closing execution mode), A special notification (for example, “If you can stock a ball at the end of the jackpot game, a big chance!”) May be performed. When the second opening / closing execution mode does not run continuously or when the possibility is high (when the storage release ball cannot pass the V winning sensor 192 or is difficult to pass during the first opening / closing execution mode) May perform different notifications, or may be configured not to perform notification.

  Furthermore, when there is a hold at a specific timing in the second opening / closing execution mode, the hold information that is held and the release waiting time corresponding to the hold information are prefetched, and the prefetch result and the selected storage release It is good also as a structure which alert | reports based on the relationship with a period. For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second opening / closing execution mode continues or is highly likely, at the predetermined timing which is any timing from after the pre-reading until the end of the previous second opening / closing execution mode It can be set as the structure which performs special alerting | reporting.

  (39) In the sixth embodiment, the hold information is not stored even if a winning is made to the operating ports 38 and 39 during the opening standby time or during the first opening / closing execution mode. However, the hold information is stored. It is good also as a structure to be made. In addition, as in the fifth embodiment, after the first opening / closing execution mode ends, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state when a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a waiting time A is set). It is also possible to use only the standby time B). In this case, for example, 4 sec is further provided as the opening waiting time. In the case of 2 sec, the stored ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode, and in the case of 4 sec, the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode. The predetermined period is set so that the stored ball cannot pass through the V winning sensor 192.

  Then, when there is a hold at a specific timing which is any timing from the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 until the end of the first first opening / closing execution mode, the hold information and the hold information are held. It may be configured to pre-read the opening standby time and perform notification based on the result. For example, when the waiting time for opening for 2 seconds is prefetched, a special notification (for example, “If the ball can be stocked, it is large if the ball can be stocked” at a predetermined timing from the time after the prefetching to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. “Chance!”). In this case, since it becomes possible for the player to grasp that there is a storage in the first opening / closing execution mode, the player is more motivated to cause the storage, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible. In addition, since prefetching is performed due to the holding information, it is possible to increase the willingness to cause the holding. In addition, when the open waiting time of 4 sec is prefetched, a notification different from the special notification may be performed, or a configuration in which notification is not particularly performed may be employed.

  (40) In the sixth embodiment, the standby time B may be diversified. As a result, the length of the advantageous period starting after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode can be diversified, and the degree of advantage can be made different. In that case, it is good also as a structure which performs the predetermined alert | report which suggests the standby | waiting time B (period until storage cancellation | release) at a specific timing (for example, at the time of completion | finish of previous 1st opening / closing execution mode). In this case, since the release timing of the storage can be predicted, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the first opening / closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the release of storage. The predetermined notification may not be performed. In this case, since the release timing of the storage becomes difficult to predict, it is expected that the stored ball will continue to be watched until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  (41) In the seventh embodiment, the winning ball to the accessory device 150 is distributed to the exit guide unit 203, and the game ball is stored in the exit guide unit 203, which is advantageous. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific receiving unit (a receiving unit different from the outlet guide unit 203 and the V winning port guide unit 204) or a specific passing unit (the sensor 193 and the V winning sensor 192 provided in the accessory device 150) By distributing the winning balls to different passing portions), the exit guide unit 203 is closed (the winning balls cannot be accepted), or the exit guide unit 203 is changed to the V winning unit guide unit 204 and V It is good also as a structure which the number of winning opening guide parts 204 increases. In addition, the configuration in which the exit guide unit 203 is changed to the V winning guide unit 204 includes a first mode for guiding the game ball received by the exit guide unit 203 to the exit sensor 193 and the V winning sensor 192. The structure which provides the deriving means which can be switched to a 2nd aspect, and the switching means which switches the aspect of a deriving means from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect can be considered.

  (42) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released based on the passage of time. However, the storage may be released in accordance with the number of winnings to the accessory device 150. In this case, it can be set as the structure which cancel | releases storage based on the said winning number becoming a predetermined number determined beforehand. For example, when the winning device 150 is not easily won, the game ball can be stored in the exit guide unit 203 without sufficiently obtaining the allocation opportunity to the exit guide unit 203 ( The advantageous state) may end. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, the above state continues until the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, so that an opportunity to distribute to the exit guide unit 203 can be appropriately secured.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which cancels | releases accumulation | storage based on having generated V prize. In this case, the earlier the V winning is made, the longer the period (period A) for increasing the number of stored balls for the next round, and it becomes possible to advance the game more advantageously. For example, after the start of the next round game (period B), the storage can be immediately released when a V prize is generated.

  (43) In the seventh embodiment, when the storage is canceled, the entire release is performed (all the stored balls are discharged), but the partial release is performed (a part of the stored balls is discharged). It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the round game by which storage is cancelled | released fully in the 2nd opening / closing execution mode and the round game by which partial cancellation | release are produced.

  (44) In the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a round game that cannot be stored may occur in the second opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the remaining ball determination can be executed corresponding to the end of the round game that is not allowed to be stored as in the second embodiment.

  (45) In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the storage can be generated at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (the storage occurs in the final round and it is in the ending period) Also, the V winning percentage in the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode may be increased by the stored balls. In this case, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the storage may be continued until a predetermined period elapses from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, or the first opening / closing after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which continues until the frequency | count of execution of execution mode reaches the predetermined number of times defined beforehand. In the former case, the advantageous period (period in which the V winning rate increases) can be defined by time, and in the latter case, it can be defined by the number of first opening / closing execution modes. In the latter case, when the predetermined number of times is set to a plurality of times, it is preferable that the number of reservoirs be increased. For example, when the predetermined number of times is three, if the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the first and second first opening / closing execution modes, the storage can be added. The V winning rate in the third first opening / closing execution mode can be further increased.

  (46) In the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the storage can be generated in the first opening / closing execution mode (the distribution is made to the outlet guide unit 203 in the first opening / closing execution mode). The game ball may be stored in the outlet guide unit 203. As a result, the winning ball is distributed to the exit guide unit 203 in the first first opening / closing execution mode, so that it is possible to realize a game with a higher V winning rate in the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the storage that has occurred in the previous first opening / closing execution mode is the same as in the sixth embodiment, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the previous first opening / closing execution mode, or in the next first It can be canceled based on the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure of said (39) and (40).

  (47) In the seventh embodiment, in place of or in addition to the first sorting member 300, the rotator 201 may be provided with an outlet guide portion 203 that cannot store game balls. In this case, there are an outlet guide portion 203 capable of storing a game ball and an outlet guide portion 203 that cannot be stored, and even if they are the same, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage. As a result, it is possible to add an interest that expects the former to be distributed to the outlet guide unit 203.

  (48) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released every round. However, the storage may be maintained over a plurality of rounds (for example, five rounds). In this case, as the round game is advanced, the number of outlet guides 203 that can receive the game ball is reduced, and the game performance in which the V prize is increased can be realized. However, it is preferable to increase the number of outlet guides 203 (for example, about 50) in order to suppress excessive player advantage.

  (49) In the seventh embodiment, one game ball can be stored per exit guide 203, but a plurality of game balls may be stored.

  (50) In the seventh embodiment, when a game ball is distributed to the exit guide unit 203, the probability of distribution to the V winning unit guide unit 204 in the subsequent round is increased, thereby generating a V prize. Later, it is advantageous for the player to be distributed to the exit guide unit 203 rather than to the V winning port guide unit 204. However, for example, the following configuration may be used.

  First, instead of detecting a winning ball by the winning sensor 192, the winning ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning sensor 192 and the detaching sensor 193. Then, as shown in FIG. 63, the downstream side of the V winning path 191a is bifurcated, the V winning sensor 192 is arranged in the first path 410 which is one branch path, and the other branch path. No game ball detection sensor is arranged in the second passage 411. Further, a distribution member 412 that distributes the game balls flowing through the V winning path 191 a to the first path 410 and the second path 411 is disposed at the branch point of both the paths 410 and 411. The distribution member 412 is driven and controlled by a drive unit (not shown), and the drive unit is controlled by a control signal from the main control device 81. On the other hand, the branch passage 191 b is not provided with a branch passage or a sorting member, and all of the game balls that have passed through the outlet 182 b are guided to the release sensor 193.

  In the above configuration, before a V prize is generated in one round game, the game balls that have passed through the V prize opening 182a are distributed to the first passage 410 side by the sorting member 412, and after the V prize is generated, the above game The distribution mode of the distribution member 412 is switched so that the balls are distributed to the second passage 411 side by the distribution member 412. As a result, if the game balls are distributed to the V prize opening guide unit 204 before the V prize is generated, the game balls pass through the V prize sensor 192 and the prize balls (15 balls) are paid out. When the game balls are distributed to the V prize winning guide 204 after the occurrence of the game, the game balls are discharged without passing through the V winning sensor 192, and the prize balls are not paid out. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide unit 203 after the occurrence of the V winning, the game balls pass through the sensor for removal 193 and the award balls (15 balls) are paid out. In other words, when viewed in the presence or absence of a prize ball, there is no difference between the V winning opening guide unit 204 and the exit guide unit 203 before the occurrence of the V winning, but after the occurrence of the V winning, it is distributed to the exit guide unit 203. The winning ball is obtained only in this case, and the exit guide unit 203 is more advantageous to the player than the V winning port guide unit 204.

  For the purpose of grasping the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150, a discharge detection sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball in the second passage 411 may be provided. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is not paid out even if a game ball is detected by the sensor, or a smaller number of prize balls than the number of prize balls when a game ball is detected by the detaching sensor 193 (for example, 3) may be paid out. That is, when a difference is provided in the degree of advantage depending on the prize ball, it is not always necessary that one of them has no prize ball.

  Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 63, the number of winning balls may be changed before and after the V winning is generated. Specifically, a configuration is made in which a prize ball is paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the V prize sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193, and before the occurrence of the V prize, a predetermined number is passed through the V prize sensor 192. (For example, 15) prize balls, and the number of prize balls less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) can be obtained by passing the removal sensor 193, while the number of prize balls is reversed after the V winning is generated. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained by passing the V winning sensor 192 and a smaller number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are obtained by passing the removal sensor 193. As another example, before the V prize is generated, the same number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) can be obtained regardless of whether the V prize sensor 192 or the off sensor 193 is passed. , The number of winning balls when passing the losing sensor 193 is greater than before the occurrence of the V winning (for example, 15), and the number of winning balls when passing the V winning sensor 192 is less than before the occurrence of the V winning. It is good also as a structure used as (for example, 0 pieces). Even with these configurations, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the exit guide unit 203 than to distribute the game balls to the V winning unit guide unit 204 after the occurrence of the V prize.

  Incidentally, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide part 203 in the various other examples may or may not be stored as in the seventh embodiment. In addition, the various examples described above can also be applied to a configuration in which a game ball can enter the accessory device without the opening / closing accessory 168 as in (18) above.

  (51) The configurations described in the first to seventh embodiments and the other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, for example, the warp passage 210 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the second distribution member 310 and the configuration of the opening / closing member 400 in the seventh embodiment may be applied in combination. In addition, for each of the first to seventh embodiments, or for a configuration in which some or all of the first to seventh embodiments are combined with each other, You may apply combining a part or all of a structure mutually.

  (52) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiment, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

  The following feature group is related to the background art of “a game machine such as a pachinko machine having a variable pitching device (see, for example, Patent Document 1)”. The invention which raises the degree of attention to "is desired."

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening / closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is established, and in the first opening / closing execution mode, a normal opening result is determined based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 In this case, a specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
A passing part (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass;
With
When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, it is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball does not pass (the first round game is executed when the game is passed in the round game in the continuous variation mode, The second opening / closing execution mode is executed when passing in the opening / closing execution mode),
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of the specific games is the first game. Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, second distribution by main controller 81) that allows passage through the passage part in a second specific game executed after the specific game A gaming machine having a function of controlling operation modes of the member 310 and the shutter 221).

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which variable pitch control is performed at least once with the variable pitch means being the first mode, and a game that has entered the variable pitch means When the ball passes through the passage portion, the player is in an advantageous state. For this reason, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the passage portion. Normally, a game ball can pass through a passing portion serving as an advantageous opening only in a specific game in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means has occurred. In this case, with the completion of the specific game, there is a possibility that the sense of expectation to be in an advantageous state may be lost.

  In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is the second specific game after that. It becomes the structure which can pass a passage part. In this case, if the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the chance that the game ball will be in an advantageous state after the first specific game is continued continues. For this reason, compared with the conventional game machine in which the said opportunity is complete | finished with the completion | finish of a 1st specific game, the sustainability and interest property of expectation can be improved.

  Note that in the feature A1, “when the game ball passes through the passage portion in the specific game, the passage portion (V winning sensor 192) through which the game ball entered the variable entry means can pass is provided. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player than when it does not pass (the next round game is executed when it passes in the round game in the continuous variation mode, and the second opening / closing execution mode is set when it passes through the first opening / closing execution mode. The first passing portion (V winning sensor 192) is different from the first passing portion as a passing portion through which the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means can pass. A distribution means (rotating body 201) having a second passage part (detachment sensor 193) and capable of distributing the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the first passage part and the second passage part; ), The variable pitching means When the game balls entered are distributed to the first passage by the distribution means, it is more advantageous for the player than when the game balls are distributed to the second passage (passing in a round game in continuous variation mode) In this case, the next round game is executed, and when passing in the first opening / closing execution mode, the second opening / closing execution mode is executed).

  Feature A2. Means (second distribution member 310, guide passage 183, rotation, etc.) that allow the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the second specific game to pass through the passage part in the second specific game A gaming machine according to Feature A1, comprising a body 201).

  According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the previous first specific game can pass through the passage part in the second specific game after that, and the second specific game that follows There may be a case where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the game can pass through the passage portion in the second specific game as it is. For this reason, when acquiring the advantageous state in the second specific game, both the game ball entered in the first specific game and the game ball entered in the second specific game have a chance to acquire the advantageous state. . Thereby, the acquisition opportunity of an advantageous state can be expanded and interest property improves.

Feature A3. The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide portion 215) upstream of the passage portion. Stagnation means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) capable of stagnation without performing;
A stagnation release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the stagnation so that the game balls in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the second specific game;
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the game ball can be moved toward the passing portion by retaining the game ball in the variable pitching means and releasing the retention. In this case, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passing portion can be controlled by the release timing of the stay, and the passing portion can be passed at a timing that does not depend on the timing at which the variable ball is entered. For example, if the configuration is such that the game ball is likely to be carried over to the second specific game when the ball enters at a specific timing, such as at the end of the first specific game, there is a risk that the target shot will be rampant. For example, such an action is suppressed, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature A4. Distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to the stay means side and a side different from the stay means side;
The distribution means is divided into a first distribution mode (distribution state) in which game balls can be distributed to the staying means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) in which game balls can be distributed to the different side. A distribution control means (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main control device 81);
With
The gaming machine according to A3, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is canceled by the retention cancellation means.

  According to the above configuration, distribution to the staying means side is allowed after the staying of the game balls is released. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the staying means side after a space is secured in the predetermined area where the game ball is retained. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the staying means, but the staying of the game ball is already blocked. become.

  Feature A5. The stay release means does not release the stay in a situation where the variable entry means is in the first mode, and releases the stay in a situation in which the variable entrance means is in the second mode. A gaming machine according to Feature A3 or A4, characterized in that it comprises means for

  In the first mode in which a game ball can enter or easily enter the variable entry means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable entry means. For this reason, if the stay is released under the situation of the first mode, the player may miss the release of the stay. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the retention is released under a situation where the game ball is not allowed to enter or is difficult to enter the variable entry means, it is possible to suppress overlooking of the retention release.

Feature A6. Distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game into the stay means side and a side different from the stay means side. Prepared,
The game balls distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means can pass through the passing part in the second specific game, while the game balls distributed to the different side by the distribution means are The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to pass through the passage portion in a first specific game.

  According to the above configuration, a game in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is carried over to the second specific game after that, and the game ball is passed to the passing portion in the first specific game. A game to be passed can be constructed. Thereby, the game nature of a specific game is diversified, and the novel game nature which is not in the past can be provided. Further, by providing the sorting by the sorting means, it is possible to clarify the game separation, and to suppress the confusion of the player.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the game balls distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means are easier to pass through the passage portion than the game balls distributed to the different side. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the game balls that have entered the variable entry means are distributed to the stay means side. In addition, when the stagnation occurs, the player can easily have a special impression, and the significance of providing the stagnation means as a whole can be enhanced.

  In addition, this feature is that “the probability that the game balls distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means pass through the passing portion is higher than the probability that the game balls distributed to the different side pass through the passage portion. In other words, it ’s getting higher.

  Feature A8. The probability that a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the staying means by the distribution means is lower than the probability that the game balls are distributed to the different side by the distribution means. A gaming machine according to Feature A7.

  According to the said structure, it can suppress that it becomes excessively advantageous for a player, raising the significance which provided the staying means.

Feature A9. First sorting means as the sorting means;
Second distribution means (rotating body 201) capable of distributing the game balls distributed to the different sides by the first distribution means to a plurality of passage parts including a specific passage part as the passage part; A gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a passing opportunity for the passage part while adding interest to the movement of the game balls distributed to different sides by the first distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game even when the game balls that have entered the variable entry means cannot be distributed to the stay means side.

  Feature A10. The first allocating means and the second allocating means are visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the first allocating means is lower than the visibility of the second allocating means. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the visibility of the first allocating means is made lower than that of the second allocating means, and the first allocating means is aimed at the distribution timing to the staying means side. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the second distribution means, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are distributed, and to increase interest in the second distribution means and improve the presence.

  Feature A11. The feature ball according to claim A9 or A10, wherein the game ball released from the stay by the stay release means is configured to be able to pass through the specific passage portion without passing through the second distribution means. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to consider the stay release ball when designing the operation of the second distribution means, and the control of the second distribution means can be simplified. Further, since the stay release ball is configured not to pass through the second distribution means, it is suppressed that the stay release ball and the game balls distributed to different sides interfere with each other in the second distribution means. . Accordingly, when a situation occurs in which one of the game balls is likely to be distributed to the specific passing portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as inhibition by the other game ball.

Feature A12. First release means as the stay release means;
A second release means for releasing the stay so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the first specific game;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A11, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there may occur a case where the stay release ball passes through the passage part in the first specific game. Thereby, the player's interest in the release timing can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A13. After the start of the specific game, a predetermined end condition (the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 being the upper limit number or the opening count of the opening / closing accessory 168 being the upper limit number) is satisfied. Specific game ending means for ending the specific game (a function of executing processing for opening by the main control device 81),
The specific game ending means is capable of continuing the specific game until the end condition is satisfied even if the game ball passes through the passing section before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12.

  For example, in a configuration in which a specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the carry-over ball from the first specific game passes before the ball enters the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. When passing through the section, the second specific game is terminated without entering the ball, and there may be a disadvantage that the second specific game cannot be sufficiently played. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied. It is possible to appropriately secure the game period of the specific game.

Feature A14. The game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting to the special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed a plurality of times is provided. ,
The special game state is configured such that the next specific game can be executed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passage in one specific game.
The specifying means is configured such that, in the special gaming state, a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means in the first specific game can pass through the passage portion in the second specific game. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

  In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by passing the game ball through the passage part in one specific game. It becomes possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passage is a condition for executing the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first can pass through the passage part in the second specific game executed after that. It becomes. When a game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, it is possible to execute a specific game executed next to the second specific game (referred to as a third specific game for convenience). When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game has an effect on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

Feature A15. The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide portion 215) upstream of the passage portion. Stagnation means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) capable of stagnation without performing;
A stagnation release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the stagnation so that the game balls in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the second specific game;
With
When the game ball has not yet passed through the passing portion at the specific timing of the first specific game (the timing when the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 reaches 8), the stay release means The game machine according to Feature A14, further comprising means for releasing the stay so that the game ball in the game can pass through the passage portion in the first specific game.

  Under the configuration in which passing the game ball through the passage part is a condition for carrying out the next specific game, even if the game ball can be retained in the first specific game, the game ball passes through the passage part. If not, the next specific game will not be performed, and the stay will be lost. In this case, the player is greatly discouraged and there is a risk that the willingness to play is attenuated. In this regard, in the present configuration, when the passing part is not passed at the specific timing of the first specific game, the passing part is passed through the first specific game using the staying ball. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the next specific game is not performed while the game ball is retained. Moreover, since such a relief is limited to the case where there is a staying ball, an effect of enhancing the willingness to cause the staying can be expected.

Feature A16. The predetermined condition is established based on a game ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating port 38, 39) provided in the game area,
A transition to a special gaming state (second opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passage in the specific game (first opening / closing execution mode); The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein:

  If a specific game is executed on the basis of the game ball entering the ball entrance section provided in the game area, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the passage section in the specific game, the player It shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Under such a premise, in this configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first can pass through the passage portion in the second specific game after that. . In this case, if a game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, a chance to acquire the specific game state is generated by the game ball even after the first specific game ends. For this reason, interest is improved compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the above-mentioned chance ends with the end of the first specific game.

Feature A17. A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (winning to the operation ports 38, 39);
The predetermined condition is that the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific result (a jackpot result),
The gaming state has a first gaming state (low probability mode) and a second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the lottery result of the lottery means is more likely to be the specific result than the first gaming state. ,
Features A1 to A16 comprising means for shifting the gaming state after the end of the particular game to the second gaming state based on the passing of the game ball through the passage part in the particular game. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing part in the specific game, the lottery result is shifted to the second game state where the specific result is likely to be the specific result. Under such a premise, in this configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first can pass through the passage portion in the second specific game after that. . In this case, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the game ball has a chance to shift to the second game state even after the first specific game ends. For this reason, interest is improved compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the above-mentioned chance ends with the end of the first specific game.

Feature A18. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening / closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is established, and in the first opening / closing execution mode, a normal opening result is determined based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 In this case, a specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game among the plurality of specific games is later than the first specific game. Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by main controller 81) to be discharged from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game of Function to control the operation mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic A1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in any of said characteristics A1-A17 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A18, the configuration is any one of the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening / closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is established, and in the first opening / closing execution mode, a normal opening result is determined based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 In this case, a specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function to execute the remaining sphere determination process), and
With
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the specific process executing means does not perform the separate specific processing for each of the specific games, and the one specific specification for a plurality of the specific games. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to execute processing.

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once with the variable pitch means being the first mode, and the game ball enters the variable pitch means. When the ball is played, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means is executed. Thereby, the entering / exiting of the game ball with respect to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of obtaining a privilege illegally is suppressed.

  Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining situation is performed for each specific game. In this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of discharges are consistent at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, and the degree of freedom in game design is limited. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since one specific process is executed for a plurality of specific games, it is sufficient that the number of balls entered and the number of discharges correspond in the plurality of specific games. As a result, the specific game can be terminated with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in game design can be increased. In addition, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, the processing load of the specific process can be reduced.

Feature B2. A game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed a plurality of times;
A passing part (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass;
With
The special game state is configured such that the next specific game can be executed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passage in one specific game.
The specific process execution means is configured to execute one specific process for a plurality of specific games without performing the specific process for each specific game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by passing the game ball through the passage part in one specific game. It becomes possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passage is a condition for executing the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, in the special game state, it is possible to execute one specific process for a plurality of specific games. In this case, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in one specific game is carried over to the next specific game and passes through the passing section, thereby realizing a novel game performance in which the execution of the specific game is determined. be able to.

  Feature B3. The specific process execution means does not execute the specific process for each specific game in the special game state, and executes the specific process in response to completion of the last specific game (main control device) 81. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, further comprising a function of executing a remaining ball determination process by 81.

  According to the above configuration, since one specific process is executed collectively for the special gaming state, the execution frequency of the specific process is low, and the processing load is reduced. In addition, since specific processing is executed in units of special gaming states, it is not necessary to switch over to allow carry-over of game balls in certain specific games and to restrict carry-over in other specific games. Processing can be simplified.

  Feature B4. Out of the specific game executed in the special game state, at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first is discharged from the variable ball entry means. And means for carrying over to the second specific game executed after the first specific game and allowing the second specific game to pass through the passage part (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp path) 210). The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein the gaming machine is provided with 210).

  According to the above configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first can pass through the passage part in the second specific game that is executed after that. When a game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, it is possible to execute a specific game executed next to the second specific game (referred to as a third specific game for convenience). When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game has an effect on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to feature B3, in order to execute one specific process collectively for the special game state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is carried over to the subsequent specific game. However, an effect that it is possible to appropriately determine the remaining sphere abnormality is expected.

Feature B5. Out of the specific game executed in the special game state, at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first is discharged from the variable ball entry means. And means for carrying over to the second specific game executed after the first specific game and allowing the second specific game to pass through the passage part (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp path) 210),
The carryover is allowed in the first specific game, while the carryover is restricted in the second specific game,
The specific process execution means does not perform the specific process corresponding to the end of the first specific game, while executing the specific process corresponding to the end of the second specific game (remaining by the main control device 81) The game machine according to Feature B2, further comprising a function of executing a ball determination process.

  According to the above configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first can pass through the passage part in the second specific game that is executed after that. When a game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, it is possible to execute a specific game executed next to the second specific game (referred to as a third specific game for convenience). When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game has an effect on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

  Further, in this configuration, by restricting carry-over in the second specific game, it is possible to match the number of balls entered and discharged from the variable ball entry means at the end of the second specific game. In addition, since the specific process is performed at the end of the second specific game, the specific process can be executed in the middle of the special game state. Thereby, it is possible to quickly grasp the remaining ball abnormality, and it is possible to suppress an increase in damage to the game hall when an illegal act is performed. In addition, since the specific process is not executed at the end of the first specific game in which carryover is allowed, erroneous determination of the remaining ball abnormality can be suppressed.

Feature B6. In the special game state, the specific game can be executed up to a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein at least the specific game immediately before the specific number of times is the second specific game.

  Even if a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game immediately before the specific number of times passes through the passage portion in the specific game of the specific number of times, the next specific game is not executed. The merit of the player who allows the carry-over of the game ball in the specific game immediately before the specific number of times is poor. Utilizing such characteristics, in this configuration, the specific game immediately before the specific number of times is set as a specific game whose carry-over is restricted, and specific processing is executed at the end of the specific game. This makes it possible to execute the specific process in the middle of the special game state without losing the player's profit.

Feature B7. At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide portion 215) upstream of the passage portion. Stagnation means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) capable of stagnation without performing;
A stagnation release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the stagnation so that the game balls in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the second specific game;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, comprising:

  According to the said structure, when implement | achieving carry over of a game ball, it can be set as a practically preferable aspect. In particular, it is possible to control how long the game ball remains in the variable ball entry means after the first specific game is ended by the release timing of the stay release means. This makes it possible to carry over the game ball to the second specific game without increasing the stay time by expanding the stay area, extending the ball passage, etc., and reducing the size of the variable entry means and the complexity of the structure It becomes possible. Further, by providing the stay release means, it is possible to carry the game ball to the second specific game without depending on the occurrence timing of the stay. For example, if the game ball is carried over to the second specific game only when the stagnation occurs at a specific timing, it becomes necessary for the player to pay attention to the timing of the stagnation, and the attention is likely to be distracted Become. In this regard, according to the present configuration, such consideration is not necessary, and the game can be concentrated on staying.

  Feature B8. As a result of the specific process, an abnormality handling means (a function for executing the game stop process by the main control device 81) for executing an abnormality response process (game stop process) when a remaining ball abnormality is recognized is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

  According to the above configuration, since the abnormality handling process is executed when the remaining sphere abnormality is recognized, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Feature B9. At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of specific games is assigned to a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entry means. ), A staying means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) capable of staying without discharging from the variable ball entry means;
Release means for releasing the stagnation (shutter by the main control device 81) so that the game balls in the predetermined area are discharged from the variable ball entry means in a second specific game executed after the first specific game. 221 is a function to make the open state),
With
The abnormality handling means includes means for executing the abnormality handling process without releasing the stay by the staying means when the remaining ball abnormality is recognized. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the abnormality handling process is canceled, the stay is not released. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the attendant or the like of the game hall to be present with the staying ball remaining. As a result, when the clerk or the like can confirm that the act is not fraudulent, the player can be rescued using the staying ball.

Feature B10. Provided with an abnormality canceling means (function for executing main processing by the main control device 81) for canceling the abnormality handling process executed by the abnormality handling means;
The abnormality canceling means is
A first means for canceling the abnormality handling process so that the stay is not released when a specific operation is performed (when the power switch 92b is operated without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a);
When an operation different from the specific operation is performed (when the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed and the power switch 92b is operated), the abnormality handling process is canceled so that the stay is released. Two means,
The gaming machine according to Feature B9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, by changing the operation mode, it is possible to select whether or not to retain the staying sphere and cancel the abnormality handling process. Thereby, when it is confirmed whether or not the cause of the remaining ball abnormality is an illegal act by an attendant of the game hall or the like, it is possible to change the response according to the confirmation result.

Feature B11. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (function for executing the opening / closing process by the main controller 81). When,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Round game execution means for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once by a predetermined condition (when the second opening / closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is established) A function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function to execute the remaining sphere determination process), and
With
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the specific processing execution means does not perform the specific processing for each of the round games, and specifies the one specific for a plurality of round games. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to execute processing.

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic B1. In this feature, “round game” means that “the number of game balls that have entered the variable entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit, or the period or number of times that the variable entry means has the second mode. Can be expressed as a game that ends based on a predetermined upper limit value. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in either of the said characteristics B1-B10 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature B12. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening / closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is established, and in the first opening / closing execution mode, a normal opening result is determined based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 In this case, a specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function to execute the remaining sphere determination process), and
With
The specific process execution means executes the specific process for entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means and discharging the game ball in the specific game at a specific timing after the end of the specific game. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to perform.

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once with the variable pitch means being the first mode, and the game ball enters the variable pitch means. When the ball is played, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means is executed. Thereby, the entering / exiting of the game ball with respect to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of obtaining a privilege illegally is suppressed.

  Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining situation is performed at the end of the specific game. In this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of discharges are consistent at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, and the degree of freedom in game design is limited. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the end of the specific game, it is sufficient that the number of balls entered corresponds to the number of discharged balls at the specific timing. As a result, the specific game can be terminated with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in game design can be increased.

Feature B13. As the variable pitch control, a first control mode (open / close patterns P1, P2) and a second control mode (short open mode) in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable pitch means than the first control mode, Have
In the second specific game executed next to the first specific game when the specific process is executed after the first specific game executed first among the plurality of specific games, the second The gaming machine according to Feature B12, wherein the specific process can be executed in a situation where the variable pitch control is performed according to a control mode.

  Considering the smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to execute them in parallel rather than executing the specific process and then executing the specific game. In this regard, in the above configuration, the second control mode is provided as one mode of the variable pitch control, and the specific process is performed in the execution period of the control mode. When variable entry control is performed in the second control mode, it is difficult for game balls to enter the variable entry means, and by performing specific processing according to the period, there is a mismatch between the number of entries and the number of discharges. It can be suppressed. That is, according to this configuration, the specific process can be executed during the second specific game, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted.

Feature B14. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Under a predetermined condition (becoming a big hit), a round game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once can be executed a plurality of times. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special gaming state (second opening / closing execution mode);
First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function to execute the remaining sphere determination process), and
Means for restricting execution of the specific process in the predetermined round game executed in the specific game state (the remaining ball determination for each round game is not executed, or the remaining ball at the end of the second to fourth round games) Function that does not execute the judgment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the special game state, and when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means is executed. Thereby, the entering / exiting of the game ball with respect to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of obtaining a privilege illegally is suppressed.

  Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining situation is performed for each round game. In this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of discharges match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the round game, and the degree of freedom in game design is limited. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific process is restricted in a predetermined round game in the specific game state, it becomes possible to end the round game with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, The degree of freedom in game design can be increased. In addition, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, the processing load of the specific process can be reduced. In addition, you may apply each structure as described in any of the said characteristics B1-B13 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature B15. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function to execute the remaining sphere determination process), and
With
The specific process execution means does not perform the specific process for each of the variable entry controls when the variable entry control is executed a plurality of times, and performs the variable entry control a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that one of the specific processes can be executed.

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic B1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in any of the said characteristics B1-B14 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B15, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (function for executing the opening / closing process by the main controller 81). When,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
With
As the specific game in which the variable entry control is performed at least once, the first specific game (first opening / closing execution mode) executed according to the first condition is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game. And a second specific game (second opening / closing execution mode) executed under a second condition different from the first condition,
The second condition is that a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through a passing portion (V winning sensor 192),
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the second specific game is a predetermined region (for entrance) upstream from the passage portion until a specific timing after the end of the second specific game. Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, function of controlling operation mode of second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by main controller 81) that can be retained in guide portion 215) When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, in order to generate the second specific game that is advantageous to the player, it is necessary that the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the passage portion. Under such circumstances, in this configuration, at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the second specific game can be retained in the variable entry means even after the end of the second specific game. It has become. According to this configuration, after the end of the second specific game, the game ball exists in the variable ball entry means without causing the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, and the game ball passes through the passage portion. A new second specific game is executed by passing. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to generate a new second specific game by a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means during the second specific game, and the interest is improved.

  Feature C2. When the second specific game is finished, means for causing the stay to occur and the case in which the stay does not occur (execute processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81) The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising a function).

  According to the above configuration, the game ball does not always stay at the end of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to provide an enjoyment to enjoy whether or not a stagnation can be caused at the end of the second specific game, and the interest is improved compared to the case where the second specific game is merely digested vaguely. .

  Feature C3. The specifying means is a means for releasing the stay regardless of the game situation (function of executing the process of step S3009 by the main control device 81) when the specific timing comes after the end of the second specific game. A gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is provided.

  In the above-described configuration, at the specific timing after the second specific game, the retention of the game ball is released regardless of the game situation at that time. Timing adjustment with execution timing of 1 specific game is not made. For this reason, there is room for the player to generate the first specific game so as to match the timing at which the stay release ball passes through the passing portion, and thereby it is possible to provide an enjoyment to enjoy whether or not both timings match It becomes. In this feature, “regardless of the game situation” may be rephrased as “regardless of the execution situation of the first specific game”.

  Feature C4. A feature C3 includes a notification control unit that controls the predetermined notification unit such that the predetermined notification indicating the specific timing or a period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a staying ball at the end of the second specific game, the timing at which the staying ball passes through the passage portion can be predicted by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, a game of generating the first specific game so as to be adapted to the prediction timing is created, and the interest is improved.

  Note that instead of or in addition to the feature C4, “a specific notification that suggests the progress of the period up to the specific timing or the elapsed time since the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, it may include a feature that a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, it is possible to predict the timing at which the staying sphere passes the passing portion, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the feature C4. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature C4, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification unit as the notification unit that performs the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification unit.

Feature C5. A game ball launched by the launching means is allowed to enter, and a ball entry part (actuating port 38, 39) serving as a trigger for starting the first specific game;
A holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of holding off the execution of the start trigger corresponding to the incoming ball when a gaming ball enters the incoming ball part during the execution of the second specific game When,
Means capable of executing the first specific game based on the hold after the end of the second specific game when there is the hold at the end of the second specific game (data setting process by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein

  According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game can be generated using the hold, but if there is no hold, the game ball is entered into the entrance portion. Unless this is done, the first specific game cannot be generated. That is, when the suspension is generated, the first specific game can be generated more easily than the case where it is not, and the game can be advantageously advanced. Furthermore, in the said structure, when the entrance to a entrance ball arises during execution of a 2nd specific game, it becomes the structure which a holding | maintenance arises. As a result, in the second specific game, it is possible to simultaneously give a pleasure of entering the game ball into the variable entry means and a pleasure of causing the game ball to enter the entrance part and causing a hold.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the ball entry portion is disposed downstream of the variable ball entry means.

  According to the above configuration, since the entrance portion is arranged on the downstream side of the variable entrance means, it is possible to give pleasure to cause a hold by a spilled ball from the variable entrance means in the second specific game. . This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in game balls that have not entered the variable entry means, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature C7. When the first condition is satisfied and the first result is obtained (the value of the acquired release type counter CS is 50 to 99) after the end of the second specific game, the first specific game is set to the first timing ( When the first condition is satisfied and the second result is different from the first result (the value of the acquired opening type counter CS is 0 to 49). Any one of the features C3 to C6, further comprising means for executing the first specific game at a second timing (after the elapse of an opening waiting time of 0.5 sec) different from the first timing. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the first specific game when the first condition is satisfied is diversified. In this case, it is difficult to match the passage timing and the execution timing of the first specific game even if the first condition is established by predicting the timing at which the stay release ball passes the passage portion. As a result, aiming can be suppressed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Feature C8. A game ball launched by the launching means is allowed to enter, and a ball entry part (actuating port 38, 39) serving as a trigger for starting the first specific game;
A holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of holding off the execution of the start trigger corresponding to the incoming ball when a gaming ball enters the incoming ball part during the execution of the second specific game When,
First specific game execution means (main control device) capable of executing the first specific game based on the hold after the end of the second specific game when there is the hold at the end of the second specific game 81, a function for executing the data setting process according to 81),
With
When the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing (after the elapse of the 2 sec open waiting time), the stay release ball whose release has been released passes through the passing section in the first specific game. When the first state that can pass or is easy to pass and is executed at a second timing different from the first timing (after the elapse of the waiting waiting time of 0.5 sec), the stay release ball is changed to the first specific game. The gaming machine according to C3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be in a second state in which the passage portion cannot pass or is difficult to pass compared to the first state.

  According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game can be generated using the hold, but if there is no hold, the game ball is entered into the entrance portion. Unless this is done, the first specific game cannot be generated. That is, when the suspension is generated, the first specific game can be generated more easily than the case where it is not, and the game can be advantageously advanced. However, when the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing, the second specific game is likely to occur. However, when the first specific game is executed at the second timing, the second specific game is hardly generated. In other words, the state where the second specific game is not guaranteed only when there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, and the player cannot stay out of mind even if the game ball stays and causes a hold. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to keep paying attention to the development of the game after the end of the second specific game, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. Pre-specification means for specifying whether or not the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing before execution of the start trigger based on the hold (a function of performing prefetching by the main control device 81) )When,
When the first specific game specifies that the first specific game is executed at the first timing, the specific notification is performed by a predetermined notification unit before the end of the second specific game. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means;
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to play the second specific game after knowing that the possibility of a villa is increased if the game ball stays at the end of the second specific game. Become. Thereby, the willingness to stay at the end of the second specific game can be remarkably increased, and the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be further improved.

  Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein a gaming ball staying in the variable pitching means is visible from the front of the gaming machine after the end of the second specific game.

  According to the above configuration, the player can visually recognize the presence or absence of the stay, and when the stay occurs, the expectation that a new second specific game will be generated can be effectively given.

Feature C11. First detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable entry means;
Second detection means (V winning sensor 192, removal sensor 193) capable of detecting the discharge of the game ball from the variable entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) for executing specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable pitching means A function for executing the remaining ball determination process),
In the second specific game, the specific process execution means performs the specific process for entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means and discharging the game ball that has entered the variable game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10, further comprising means that is executed after being discharged from the means.

  According to the above configuration, even when the second specific game ends with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, the number of balls entered and discharged from the variable ball entry means can be matched in the specific process, Appropriate remaining ball determination can be performed.

Feature C12. The specific process execution means is a means for executing the specific process when the predetermined determination waiting period (6 sec) has elapsed after the end of the second specific game (function of executing step S3010 by the main controller 81) )
The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein the predetermined determination waiting period is longer than a period until the staying game ball is discharged from the variable pitching means.

  In the above configuration, the specific process is executed in response to the determination waiting period elapses after the second specific game ends, and the staying ball is discharged from the variable entry means during the determination waiting period. The period is longer than the period up to. Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific process after discharging the staying sphere without performing the confirmation process of whether or not the staying sphere has been discharged.

  Feature C13. The specific process execution means executes the specific process in response to the elapse of the determination standby period when the determination standby period has elapsed and the first specific game is not in progress, while the determination standby period has elapsed. In the case where the first specific game is in progress, the means for executing the specific process in response to the end of the first specific game (the processes of steps S3012 to S3016 and S3002 to S3005 by the main control device 81 are executed. The gaming machine according to Feature C12, which is provided with a function).

  For example, in the configuration in which the specific process is performed in accordance with the elapse of the determination waiting period when the first specific game is in progress when the determination waiting period elapses, a ball enters the variable pitching means immediately before the determination waiting period elapses. When a game ball that has entered after the elapse of the period is discharged, the specific process is executed in a state where the number of discharged balls is smaller than the number of balls entered, resulting in erroneous determination of remaining ball abnormality. In this regard, in this configuration, when the first specific game is in progress at the time of the determination waiting period, the specific process is performed after the first specific game ends, so the number of balls entered and the number of discharges are matched. The specific process can be executed, and the erroneous determination can be suppressed.

Feature C14. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (function for executing the opening / closing process by the main controller 81). When,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Specific means (second distribution) capable of retaining at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means by the variable entry control within the variable entry means even after the variable entry control. The member 310, the shutter 221, the warp passage 210, the function of controlling the operation mode of the second sorting member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic C1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in either of the said characteristics C1-C13 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C14, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable pitching control unit for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (function to execute processing during control by the main controller 81) )When,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Specific game execution means (game control by the main control device 81) for executing a specific game (first opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once according to a predetermined condition (winning to the operation ports 38, 39) Processing function), and
Specific means (second sorting member 310, shutter 221, warp path) that allows at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game to be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81),
With
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable pitching means when the game result after the specific game is the first game result (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). When the first timing is reached and the game result after the specific game is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period has passed without the first opening / closing execution mode occurring), A gaming machine comprising means for setting a second timing different from the one timing.

  In the above configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in a specific game can be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. At that time, the discharge timing of the game ball is diversified into a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing, and the interest can be improved as compared with the case where the discharge timing is uniform. Further, the first timing is set when the game result after the specific game is the first game result, and the second timing is set when the game result after the specific game is the second game result. In this case, the game after the end of the specific game affects the discharge timing of the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means in the specific game. Thereby, interest in the game after the end of the specific game is increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

  Feature D2. The feature D1 according to the feature D1, wherein the player's degree of advantage differs depending on whether the game ball is discharged from the variable entry means at the first timing or the second timing. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to have a strong interest in whether the game result after the specific game becomes the first game result or the second game result, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game ends Increased further.

Feature D3. When the first game result is not obtained after the specific game, the second game result is obtained.
The feature D1 or D2 is characterized in that the game ball is discharged at the first timing is more advantageous to the player than the game ball is discharged at the second timing. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the willingness to make the game result after the specific game become the first game result is aroused, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game ends is further increased.

Feature D4. Based on the fact that a predetermined game result (V winning) is obtained by the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, the special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game is shifted to Game state transition means (function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game;
The specific means carries over from the previous specific game in the specific game executed in response to the first game result when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game. Features D1 to D1 are provided with means for discharging the game ball (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 and S3302 by the main control device 81) so that the predetermined game result is obtained by the played game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

  According to the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is established by a specific timing after the end of the specific game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game is shifted to the special game state. Can do. Thereby, it is possible to give an advantageous period in which it is easy to shift to the special game state after the end of the specific game. As a result, the game after the specific game is excited and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the advantageous period is limited to a specific timing, it is possible to create a case where the advantageous period ends when a predetermined condition is not satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to play in the thrill that the advantageous period may end without the predetermined condition being satisfied, and the interest is improved.

  Feature D5. Means for allowing the predetermined game result to be obtained in the previous specific game when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game (the first game) The game machine according to Feature D4, further comprising a second distribution member 310, a rotating body 201, and a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 by the main controller 81).

  According to the above configuration, a predetermined game result can be obtained even in the previous specific game. In this case, as a chance to shift to the special game state, a predetermined condition is established by a first opportunity that becomes a predetermined game result in the previous specific game and a specific timing, and a predetermined game result is obtained in the subsequent specific game A plurality of opportunities, such as a second opportunity, can be provided. Normally, the transition to the special game state is limited to a case where a predetermined game result is obtained in one specific game, but according to this configuration, there is room for transition to the special game state even after the end of the specific game. It is left and interest is improved.

  Feature D6. The feature D4 or D5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is established based on a game ball entering a ball entry part (actuating port 38, 39) provided in the game area. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is established based on the entrance to the entrance portion, the interest in the movement and whereabouts of the game ball on the game area is increased after the specific game is finished. It is possible to reinforce the fun to enjoy. In addition, the configuration of the feature D4 or D5 can be realized by utilizing an existing control program, and program changes can be suppressed to a small extent. Thereby, the increase in the burden of game machine design accompanying a program change can be suppressed.

Feature D7. The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entry means without being discharged from the variable ball entry means. Stagnation means (function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A stay releasing means for releasing the stay (function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81),
The stay releasing means includes means for releasing the stay so that the predetermined game result is obtained in the subsequent specific game when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the retention release timing (variation of the game ball) is changed in the gaming machine so that a predetermined result is obtained in a later specific game regardless of the timing at which the player establishes the predetermined condition. The discharge timing from the ball entry means) is controlled. As a result, the player does not have to worry about the timing of satisfying the condition, and can concentrate on establishing the predetermined condition and can play the game.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature D5, (1) a predetermined game result can be obtained in the previous specific game, and (2) a predetermined game result is not obtained in the previous specific game. It is possible to create three states such that the game ball can be retained, (3) the predetermined game result is not obtained in the previous specific game, and the game ball cannot be retained. Compared to a conventional gaming machine that has only an alternative gaming ability as to whether or not a predetermined gaming result is obtained, it is possible to expand the range of how to enjoy.

Feature D8. The game ball is discharged at the first timing is more advantageous for the player than the game ball is discharged at the second timing,
Features D1 to D7, comprising state means for changing the state after the specific game into a first state and a second state in which an expectation level as the first game result is relatively high or low. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the above configuration, the first game result is advantageous to the player, and the first state and the second state in which the expectation level is relatively high are provided, so that the game after the specific game is prevented from becoming monotonous. And it becomes possible to improve interest.

Feature D9. The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game;
The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein a period until the specific timing is different between the first state and the second state.

  According to the above configuration, the expectation level of the first game result is high when the period up to the specific timing is long, and the expectation level is low when the period is short, so that the expectation level can be diversified easily for the player.

  Feature D10. D4 thru | or D4 thru | or characterized by providing the alerting | reporting control means which controls the said predetermined alerting | reporting means so that the predetermined alerting | reporting which suggests the said specific timing or the period until the said specific timing is performed by a predetermined alerting | reporting means. The gaming machine according to any one of D9.

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific timing by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize by what time the predetermined condition should be established, and to improve playability.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the feature D10, “a specific notification that indicates an elapsed state of the period until the specific timing or an elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, it may include a feature that a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. In this case, by referring to the specific notification, it is possible to grasp the remaining period until the specific timing, and it is possible to effectively give a sense of tension that the advantageous period may end without becoming the first game result. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature D10, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification unit as the notification unit that performs the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification unit.

Feature D11. Based on the fact that a predetermined game result (V winning) is obtained by the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, the special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game is shifted to Game state transition means (function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entry means without being discharged from the variable ball entry means. Stagnation means (function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A stay release means for releasing the stay based on a predetermined number of times of the specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D10, wherein the predetermined game result can be achieved by the game ball released from the stay by the stay release unit.

  In the above configuration, the stay is released when the number of times of the specific game reaches the predetermined number, and a predetermined game result is obtained by the stay release ball, and the special game state is entered. As a result, it is possible to provide relief when the specific game is not shifted to the special game state no matter how many times the specific game is repeated, and the playability is improved.

Feature D12. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable pitching control unit for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (function to execute processing during control by the main controller 81) )When,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter) that allows at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means to be discharged from the variable entry means after the variable entry control. 221, the warp passage 210, the function of controlling the operation mode of the second sorting member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81),
With
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable pitching means, when the game result after the variable pitch control is the first game result (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period) ) At the first timing, and the game result after the variable entry control is a second game result different from the first game result (when the predetermined period has passed without the first opening / closing execution mode) And a means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic D1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in either of the said characteristics D1-D11 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D12, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (function for executing the opening / closing process by the main controller 81). When,
In accordance with a predetermined condition (becoming a big hit), a transition is made to a special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once can be executed multiple times. Game state transition means (function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
The game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the specific game can be retained in the predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable entry means without being discharged from the variable entry means. Stagnation means (function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A stay release means for releasing the stay so that the game balls in the predetermined area are discharged from the variable pitching means after the specific game (function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
Among the plurality of specific games executed in the special game state, in the first specific game (3 to 7 rounds) that is one specific game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is In a second specific game (12 to 16 rounds) that is easily retained by the retention means and is different from the first specific game, a game ball that has entered the variable entry means is more likely to be retained than the first specific game. Specific means (function to execute the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81) that makes it difficult to stay by
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the specific game can remain in the variable entry means even after the end of the specific game. That is, it is possible to cause a case where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is discharged from the variable ball entry means across a specific game, and novel gameplay can be provided. In this case, for example, if the retention by the retention means (in other words, the ease with which the game ball is carried over) is standardized, the carry-over of the game ball has become a daily routine, and the special gaming state is indifferent. It can be a game that only digests. In this regard, in the present configuration, stagnation by the staying means is likely to occur in the first specific game, and stagnation is less likely to occur in the second specific game, and the ease of carrying over the game ball can be diversified. This makes it possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. A distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the stay means side and a side different from the stay means side;
A distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (function to execute the processes of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81);
With
The distribution means is controlled so that the distribution mode of the distribution means is common to the first specific game and the second specific game,
The variable entry control is executed according to the feature E1, wherein the variable entry control is executed so that the ease of entering the game ball into the variable entry means differs between the first specific game and the second specific game. Game machines.

  In the above configuration, the distribution mode of the distribution means is made common between the first specific game and the second specific game, and the susceptibility to stay is varied by variable entry control. In this case, it is not necessary to finely set the distribution mode of the distribution means and the execution mode of the variable entry control in each specific game, and it is sufficient to set only the latter. For this reason, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load required for the control and the work load at the time of designing the gaming machine.

  Moreover, the following effect is also anticipated by the said structure. In a configuration in which a game ball is carried over by staying, it is easy for a player to focus on whether or not staying occurs. In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the distribution means that affects the presence or absence of stay and is watching the movement. Under such circumstances, if the movement of the sorting means is changed, the player may notice it and understand that the difference in the easiness of staying is preliminarily structured, and may be awakened. In this regard, in this configuration, since the movement of the distribution means is common to each specific game, such awareness can be suppressed. Thereby, it becomes easy to make it feel that the difference in easiness of staying is due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game ball.

Feature E3. One specific game can be divided into a plurality of game sections according to the number of executions of the variable entry control,
The allocating means is controlled so that the distribution mode of the allocating means in each of the game sections is common between the first specific game and the second specific game,
The variable entry control is executed so that the ease of entering the game ball into the variable entry means is different in at least one of the game sections between the first specific game and the second specific game. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, characterized in that:

  In the above configuration, the first specific game and the second specific game share the distribution mode of the distribution means in each game segment, while the variable entry control mode differs in at least one of the game segments. It has become. In this case, if the distribution control mode in which the distribution means easily distributes the game balls to the retention means side is combined with the entrance control mode that makes it easy to enter the variable entry means, it is possible to generate characteristics that are likely to cause retention. By combining aspects that are difficult to perform, it is possible to generate characteristics that do not easily cause retention. That is, it is possible to easily change the susceptibility to stay and to reduce the design burden of variable pitch control.

Feature E4. A passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means can pass;
In the special game state, it is possible to perform the next specific game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage part in one specific game,
Among the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game, the game balls that are not retained by the retention means can pass through the passage portion in the specific game, and the game balls that are retained by the retention means are The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to pass through the passage unit in the specific game executed after the specific game.

  In the above configuration, when a game ball passes through a passing part in one specific game, it becomes possible to perform the next specific game, and passing the game ball to the passing part is an execution condition of the next specific game. Become. Under such circumstances, in this configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in a specific game, if the game ball is not retained by the retention means, it passes through the passage section in the specific game. It becomes possible, and when it is retained by the retaining means, it is configured to be able to pass through the passage part in a later specific game. According to such a configuration, the execution of a specific game is achieved by a game ball entered in the immediately preceding specific game, and by a game ball entered in a specific game prior to the immediately preceding specific game. In this case, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that has not existed before. Thereby, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and improve interest.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature E2 or E3, “a game ball that is not retained by the staying means can pass through the passage portion in the specific game, and a game ball that is retained by the staying means is “A game ball distributed to the different side by the allocating means can pass through the passing section in the specific game, and the allocating means can pass through the passing section in the specific game executed later”. The game balls distributed to the stay means side can pass through the passage part in the specific game executed after the specific game.

Feature E5. After the start of the specific game, a predetermined end condition (the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 being the upper limit number or the opening count of the opening / closing accessory 168 being the upper limit number) is satisfied. Specific game ending means for ending the specific game (a function of executing processing for opening by the main control device 81),
The specific game ending means continues the specific game until the end condition is satisfied even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game. The gaming machine described in 1.

  For example, in a configuration in which a specific game ends when a game ball passes through the passage part, a carry-over ball from the previous specific game passes before a ball enters the variable ball entry means in a later specific game. If the player passes the part, the later specific game is finished without entering the ball, and there may be a disadvantage that the game cannot be sufficiently performed. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience is avoided, and the game period Can be secured appropriately.

  Feature E6. The specific game (the second round game) executed for the first time in the special game state is the first state (open / close pattern) in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is less likely to stay by the stay means. After being started in (combination of P1 and operation pattern SA), it is configured to change to the second state (combination of opening / closing pattern P1 and operation pattern SB) more likely to occur than the first state. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized in that

  In the first specific game, there is no specific game executed before that, and there is no carryover of game balls. For this reason, in order to carry out the next specific game, it is indispensable that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passage portion in the specific game. In this case, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the passing portion when the stay occurs, the first specific game is ended in that state, and the next specific game is not performed, and the stay ball is useless. It is easy to be worried that it will end. In this regard, in this configuration, after starting in the first state in which stagnation does not easily occur, the state changes to the second state in which stagnation is likely to occur. It becomes possible to reduce the player's anxiety.

  When this feature is applied to the feature E5, the following effects are also expected. Since the specific game ends based on the establishment of the end condition, if the end condition is satisfied early, the specific game may end in a short period of time. In this case, if the configuration is in the second state before the first state, the specific game ends during the second state or immediately after switching to the first state, and passes the game ball in the first specific game. There is a possibility that the opportunity to pass through the department may not be provided satisfactorily. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the first state is set before the second state, an opportunity to pass the game ball to the passage part in the first specific game is preferably ensured, and the next specific game is easily performed. .

Feature E7. Distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to the stay means side and a side different from the stay means side;
The distribution means is divided into a first distribution mode (distribution state) in which game balls can be distributed to the staying means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) in which game balls can be distributed to the different side. A distribution control means (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main control device 81);
With
Any of the features E1 to E6, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the stay is released by the stay release means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, distribution to the staying means side is allowed after the staying of the game balls is released. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the staying means side after a space is secured in the predetermined area where the game ball is retained. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the staying means, but the staying of the game ball is already blocked. become.

  Feature E8. The stay release means does not release the stay in a situation where the variable entry means is in the first mode, and releases the stay in a situation in which the variable entrance means is in the second mode. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that it comprises means for

  In the first mode in which a game ball can enter or easily enter the variable entry means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable entry means. For this reason, if the stay is released under the situation of the first mode, the player may miss the release of the stay. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the retention is released under a situation where the game ball is not allowed to enter or is difficult to enter the variable entry means, it is possible to suppress overlooking of the retention release.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E8, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening / closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is established, and in the first opening / closing execution mode, a normal opening result is determined based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 In this case, a specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of times of the specific game, Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second specific game executed after the specific game (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide part 203 by the opening and closing member 400);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable pitching control in which the variable pitching means is in the first mode is performed at least once. Normally, whether or not an advantageous result is obtained by the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means ends with the end of the specific game in which the ball has entered, but according to this configuration, The advantageous degree in the subsequent second specific game is changed by the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means in the specific game. Thereby, it becomes possible to play a game by linking the preceding and succeeding specific games, and it is possible to improve the interest as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the games are independent for each specific game.

  Feature F2. The specifying means is configured such that when a game ball enters the variable entry means in the first specific game and a predetermined game result is obtained (result of the game ball being distributed to the outlet guide unit 203), the second specification Even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the advantage degree in the game is set to the first degree (a state in which the V winning rate is increased by the distribution to the exit guide unit 203). If the predetermined game result is not obtained, the advantage degree in the second specific game is a second degree that is disadvantageous than the first degree (the V winning percentage is not increased because there is no distribution to the out-of-door guide part 203) The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising: a function (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400).

  For example, if it is determined to be advantageous when a ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player is satisfied when the ball is completed, and the player is interested in the game ball after entering the ball. May be diluted. In this case, even if the configuration of the variable pitching means is devised to add interest to the movement of the game ball after entering the ball, a sufficient effect cannot be expected. In this regard, in this configuration, in order to be advantageous in the second specific game, it is required that a predetermined game result is obtained, as it is not sufficient to enter the variable entry means. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball after entering the ball.

Feature F3. A plurality of receiving portions including a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means, including at least one first receiving portion (V winning opening guide portion 204) and at least one second receiving portion (outlet opening guide portion 203). A distribution means (rotating body 201) for distribution to
When a game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, a privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player, while a bonus is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function for executing round update processing by the main control device 81);
With
The gaming machine according to F2, wherein the predetermined game result is that game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game are distributed to the second receiving unit.

  In the above configuration, a privilege is granted when a game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, and no bonus is granted when a game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to a second receiving unit that does not provide a privilege, the player feels unhappy, but in this configuration, the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game. And it becomes the composition which becomes advantageous in the following 2nd specific game. Thereby, it is possible to realize a game that can be enjoyed by the player regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the first receiving unit or the second receiving unit, and it is possible to suitably increase the game motivation. In addition, since the second receiving part, which has been recognized only as disadvantageous in the past, functions as a receiving part that increases the degree of advantage, it is also possible to give unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player Become.

  Feature F4. The specifying means enters the variable entry means in the second specific game when the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game are distributed to the second receiving unit. The probability that the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit is the first probability (probability in the case where the V winning rate is increased by the distribution to the exit guide unit 203). The probability that the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the second specific game is distributed to the first receiving unit when the game ball that has entered is not distributed to the second receiving unit is the first probability. Means (a function for storing game balls in the exit guide unit 203 by the opening / closing member 400), which is a lower second probability (probability when there is no distribution to the exit guide unit 203 and the V winning rate does not increase). Features characterized by having The gaming machine according to 3.

  According to the above configuration, if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game, the game ball is easily distributed to the first receiving unit in the second specific game. It becomes easy to acquire a privilege.

Feature F5. The specifying means is an accepting means (a game ball is stored that makes it impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second accepting part when a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the second accepting part. With the function of closing the outlet guide portion 203)
The feature F3 or F4 is characterized in that the second specific game can be executed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving unit by the receiving means. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving unit, it becomes impossible to receive new game balls in the second receiving unit. In this case, in the plurality of receiving units including the first and second receiving units, the total number of receiving units capable of receiving game balls is reduced, and the proportion of the first receiving unit is increased accordingly. And since the 2nd specific game later is performed in the state where acceptance of a new game ball was impossible or difficult, in the 2nd specific game, the distribution probability to the 1st receiving part increases, and it is easy to acquire a privilege Become. In addition, in this feature, “it is difficult to accept a new game ball for the second receiving part” means that it is basically not accepted, but it is not absolutely impossible. As a specific example, In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which a game ball may be placed on the game ball stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

Feature F6. The plurality of receiving units include a third receiving unit different from any of the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit,
The privilege granting unit is configured not to grant the privilege even if game balls are distributed to the third receiving unit.
The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that a new gaming ball can be received by the third receiving unit even if the gaming ball is received by the third receiving unit.

  In the above configuration, even when game balls are distributed to the third receiving unit, no privilege is given, and there is no advantage in the second specific game. The presence of such a third receiving part can emphasize the superiority of the second receiving part. Moreover, since the 3rd receiving part becomes a receiving part unfortunate for a player, it is assumed that the psychology which wants to avoid distribution to a 3rd receiving part works. As a result, it is expected to pay more attention to the movement of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game ball.

Feature F7. Means for ending the first specific game based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the first specific game is executed (a function of executing a process during opening by the main control device 81);
The predetermined end condition includes that the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means reaches a predetermined number (9) that is determined in advance,
The gaming machine according to F5 or F6, wherein the total number of game balls that can be received by the second receiving unit is greater than the predetermined number.

  According to the said structure, it is suppressed that the situation where a game ball becomes unacceptable to a 2nd receiving part arises easily, and the period which can distribute a game ball to a 2nd receiving part can be maintained long.

Feature F8. As the means for receiving, when a game ball is received in the second receiving part, means for storing the game ball in the second receiving part (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide part 203) Prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F7, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where game balls are stored in the second receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball stored in the second receiving unit blocks the second receiving unit, so that it is impossible or difficult to receive a new game ball with respect to the second receiving unit. In other words, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving unit, it is possible to easily construct a configuration that makes the above-mentioned reception impossible. Further, since the storage ball blocks the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually, and it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game.

  Feature F9. Release means (a function of releasing the storage in the middle of the round game) that releases the state in which the acceptance of the new game ball made by the receiving means is impossible or difficult in the middle of the second specific game is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the benefit of having the game balls allocated to the second receiving unit in the first specific game can be obtained only halfway through the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving unit in a state where there is a benefit, the distribution to the first receiving unit is unavoidable under a disadvantageous situation. Thereby, a player's tension can be excited and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature F8, “a release means for releasing the state in which the acceptance of the new game ball made by the acceptance means is impossible or difficult in the middle of the second specific game” "May be a releasing means for releasing the storage of the game ball in the second receiving part in the middle of the second specific game".

  Feature F10. The release means has means for releasing the release regardless of the game situation (a function of releasing the storage after 5 seconds from the start of the round) when a specific timing in the middle of the second specific game is reached. The gaming machine of feature F9, characterized by

  According to the above configuration, the unacceptable state is canceled regardless of the gaming situation such as presence / absence of distribution to the first receiving unit. As a result, it is possible to effectively relieve a sense of tension that may not benefit from the distribution to the first receiving part, and the interest is improved.

  Feature F11. Feature F10 includes a notification control unit configured to control the predetermined notification unit so that the predetermined notification indicating the specific timing or a period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the player can predict the release timing of the unacceptable or difficult state. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp how long the second specific game is advantageous, and the playability is improved.

  In addition, instead of or in addition to the feature F11, “a specific notification that indicates an elapsed state of the period until the specific timing or an elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, it may include a feature that a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, it is possible to predict the release timing of the unacceptable state, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the feature F11. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature F11, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification unit as the notification unit that performs the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification unit.

  Feature F12. The release means includes means for releasing the game based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F9 to F11.

  For example, when a game ball does not easily enter the variable entry means, it is possible that the unacceptable state (advantageous state) may end without sufficiently receiving the distribution by the distribution means. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the unacceptable state continues until the number of game balls entering the variable entrance means reaches a predetermined number, and therefore an appropriate opportunity to receive distribution in an advantageous state is ensured appropriately. it can.

Feature F13. First sorting means as the sorting means;
A game ball that has entered the variable entry means upstream of the first assignment means in the variable entry means is a side different from the first assignment means side and the first assignment means side. A second distribution means (first distribution member 300) that distributes to
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F12, wherein the gaming balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution unit are configured to be unable to reach the second receiving unit. .

  In order to suppress the simplification of the allocation to the first receiving unit, it is conceivable to increase the number of second receiving units or increase the number of game balls received by one second receiving unit. However, the structures of the first distribution means and the second receiving unit are complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden of game machine design. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the number of game balls heading toward the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, the number of second reception parts and the reception of game balls to one second reception part The number can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, since the second distribution means is interposed, the difficulty of distributing to the second receiving unit is increased, and the sense of achievement when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit can be enhanced.

Feature F14. The game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting to the special game state (second opening / closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed a plurality of times is provided. ,
The privilege granting means is capable of executing the next specific game as the privilege when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in the one specific game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F13, wherein

  In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in one specific game, and the next specific game is performed. It becomes possible. That is, the next specific game execution condition is that game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit. Under such a premise, in this configuration, game balls are distributed to the second receiving part in the first first specific game, so that the game balls are easily distributed to the first receiving part in the second specific game. . When a game ball is distributed to the first receiving part in the second specific game, it is possible to execute a specific game that is executed next to the second specific game (referred to as a third specific game for convenience). When viewed from the first specific game, the third specific game is a specific game that is further after the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game has an effect on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

Feature F15. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (function for executing the opening / closing process by the main controller 81). When,
Round game execution means for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once by a predetermined condition (when the second opening / closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is established) A function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the first game game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first round game executed first among the plurality of round games, Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second round game executed after the round game (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening and closing member 400);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic F1. In this feature, “round game” means that “the number of game balls that have entered the variable entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit, or the period or number of times that the variable entry means has the second mode. Can be expressed as a game that ends based on a predetermined upper limit value. In addition, each configuration described in any of the features F1 to F14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature F16. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
When the variable entry control is executed a plurality of times, a game that has entered the variable entry means by the first variable entry control executed first among the plurality of the variable entry controls. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second variable entry control executed after the first variable entry control by using the ball (the game ball is stored in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400) Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic F1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in any of the said characteristics F1-F15 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features F1 to F16, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, and the features G1 to G9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and thereafter, the variable pitching control means for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (processing during control and open / close processing by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
Specific game execution means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for executing a specific game (round game) in which the variable entry control is performed at least once according to a predetermined condition (a start condition of a round game is satisfied) Function to execute)
A plurality of receiving portions including a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means, including at least one first receiving portion (V winning opening guide portion 204) and at least one second receiving portion (outlet opening guide portion 203). A sorting means (rotating body 201) that can be sorted into
When a game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, a privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player, while a bonus is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function for executing round update processing by the main control device 81);
In the specific game, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the second receiving unit than to distribute the game ball to the first receiving unit after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit. Specific means (a function for storing game balls in the exit guide unit 203 by the opening and closing member 400, a function for the exit guide unit 203 to increase the number of prize balls than the V winning entrance guide unit 204),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once with the variable pitch means being the first mode, and when the game ball enters the variable pitch means, The game balls are distributed to a plurality of receiving units including the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit. And if a game ball is distributed to a 1st receiving part, a privilege will be provided, and a privilege will not be provided when it distributes to a 2nd receiving part. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to a second receiving unit that does not provide a privilege, the player feels unhappy, but in this configuration, after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, the first receiving unit The second receiving unit is more advantageous for the player than the second receiving unit. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that can be enjoyed by the player regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the first receiving unit or the second receiving unit, and it is possible to suitably increase the game motivation.

  Feature G2. The privilege granting means corresponds to the distribution even if the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit in the specific game after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to grant the privilege.

  In the above configuration, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit, even if the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit again, a new privilege corresponding thereto is not given. In this case, as a result of the player being satisfied with the first distribution to the first receiving unit, the interest in the subsequent distribution is reduced, and the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable entry means during the remaining period of the specific game May decrease. In this regard, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit, the second receiving unit is more advantageous to the player than the first receiving unit, so even after the first allocation to the first receiving unit is made, The degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be increased.

  Further, before the first allocation to the first receiving unit, since the privilege is given by the allocation to the first receiving unit, the first receiving unit is more advantageous than the second receiving unit. After the initial distribution to the receiving unit, the second receiving unit is more advantageous than the first receiving unit. That is, the advantageous relationship is reversed before and after the allocation to the first receiving part, and two games of the game aiming for the first receiving part and the game aiming for the second receiving part are one specific game. Can be realized in Thereby, it becomes possible to improve interest property compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the former is only secured.

  Feature G3. The specifying means is a means for making the player more advantageous as the number of distribution of game balls to the second receiving unit increases after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit in the specific game. The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, further including a function of increasing the V winning rate as the number of the outlet guides 203 to which the game balls are distributed increases.

  For example, if the degree of advantage does not change even if game balls are repeatedly distributed to the second receiving unit, after distribution to the first receiving unit, once distribution to the second receiving unit can be achieved, Interest in games is likely to fade. In this regard, this configuration is advantageous as game balls are distributed to the second receiving unit, so that even after the distribution to the second receiving unit is achieved, the willingness to distribute to the second receiving unit is maintained. be able to. Thereby, a game can be enjoyed to the end of a specific game, and interest property improves.

  The feature is that “a plurality of the second receiving portions are provided, and the specifying means is configured such that, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving portion in the specific game, the distributing balls play the game balls. Means that the player becomes more advantageous as the number of the second receiving parts to which the game balls are distributed (the function that the V winning rate increases as the number of the outlet guide parts 203 to which the game balls are distributed increases) In other words.

  Feature G4. When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the specifying means distributes the game balls to the second receiving unit in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of specific games. And means for making it advantageous in the second specific game executed after the first specific game (a function of taking over the state in which the game balls are stored in the outlet guide unit 203 to the next round). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

  In the above-described configuration, the distribution to the second receiving unit in the previous first specific game increases the degree of advantage in the subsequent second specific game. That is, the distribution result to the second receiving unit is reflected across the specific game, and a novel game can be provided.

Feature G5. The specifying means is an accepting means (a game ball is stored that makes it impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second accepting part when a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the second accepting part. With the function of closing the outlet guide portion 203)
The game according to Feature G4, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving unit by the receiving means. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving unit, it becomes impossible or difficult to receive new game balls in the second receiving unit. In this case, in the plurality of receiving units including the first and second receiving units, the total number of receiving units capable of receiving game balls is reduced, and the proportion of the first receiving unit is increased accordingly. And since the 2nd specific game later is performed in the state where acceptance of a new game ball was impossible or difficult, in the 2nd specific game, the distribution probability to the 1st receiving part increases, and it is easy to acquire a privilege Become. In addition, in this feature, “it is difficult to accept a new game ball for the second receiving part” means that it is basically not accepted, but it is not absolutely impossible. As a specific example, In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which a game ball may be placed on the game ball stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

Feature G6. As the means for receiving, when a game ball is received in the second receiving part, means for storing the game ball in the second receiving part (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide part 203) Prepared,
The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where game balls are stored in the second receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball stored in the second receiving unit blocks the second receiving unit, so that it is impossible or difficult to receive a new game ball with respect to the second receiving unit. In other words, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving unit, it is possible to easily construct a configuration that makes the above-mentioned reception impossible. Further, since the storage ball blocks the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually, and it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game.

  Feature G7. Release means (a function of releasing the storage in the middle of the round game) that releases the state in which the acceptance of the new game ball made by the receiving means is impossible or difficult in the middle of the second specific game is provided. A gaming machine according to Feature G5 or G6.

  According to the above configuration, the benefit of having the game balls allocated to the second receiving unit in the first specific game can be obtained only halfway through the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving unit in a state where there is a benefit, the distribution to the first receiving unit is unavoidable under a disadvantageous situation. Thereby, a player's tension can be excited and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature G6, “a release means for releasing the state in which the acceptance of the new game ball made by the acceptance means is impossible or difficult in the middle of the second specific game. "May be a releasing means for releasing the storage of the game ball in the second receiving part in the middle of the second specific game".

Feature G8. First sorting means as the sorting means;
A game ball that has entered the variable entry means upstream of the first assignment means in the variable entry means is a side different from the first assignment means side and the first assignment means side. A second distribution means (first distribution member 300) that distributes to
With
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G7, wherein the gaming balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution unit are configured not to reach the second receiving unit. .

  In order to suppress the simplification of the allocation to the first receiving unit, it is conceivable to increase the number of second receiving units or increase the number of game balls received by one second receiving unit. However, the structures of the first distribution means and the second receiving unit are complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden of game machine design. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the number of game balls heading toward the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, the number of second reception parts and the reception of game balls to one second reception part The number can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, since the second distribution means is interposed, the difficulty of distributing to the second receiving unit is increased, and the sense of achievement when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit can be enhanced.

Feature G9. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first mode. ) Variable pitching means (the accessory device 150) that can be switched to,
The game balls that have entered the variable entry means are received by a plurality of receiving units including at least one first receiving unit (V winning port guide unit 204) and at least one second receiving unit (outlet guide unit 203). Sorting means (rotating body 201) for sorting;
When a game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, a privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player, while a bonus is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function for executing round update processing by the main control device 81);
It is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the second receiving unit than to distribute the game ball to the first receiving unit after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit. Specific means (function of storing game balls in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening and closing member 400);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic G1. Moreover, you may apply each structure as described in the said characteristics G1-G8 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  Note that the configuration of each of the features G1 to G9 is any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, and the features F1 to F16. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  The technical idea shown in each invention of each of the features A to G described above may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to G, and a part or all of them may be combined to each feature A to G. It may be applied to each of the inventions. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the inventions of the features A to G.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine (ball-use spinning-type game machine): It is equipped with variable display means that displays a final stop display of a symbol row after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, resulting from the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts on the condition that the change of the symbol is started, the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the user, and a throwing device for performing a throwing process for taking a game ball from the ball tray and providing a game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine comprising: a payout device that performs the operation of the starting operation means when a game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 38 ... 1st operation port, 39 ... 2nd operation port, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... Main control device, 92b ... Power supply switch, 97 ... Discharge control device, 98a ... RAM erase switch, 114b ... Reserved ball storage area, 150 ... Equipment device, 179 ... Inlet sensor, 183 ... Guidance path, 192 ... V prize sensor, 193 ... Sensor for removal, 201 ... Rotating body, 203 ... Outlet guide section, 204 ... V prize Mouth guide section, 210 ... warp passage, 215 ... entrance guide section, 221 ... shutter, 300 ... first sorting member, 310 ... second sorting member, 400 ... opening and closing member.

Claims (9)

Launching means for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable input that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first mode. Ball means;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
The variable entry control means for performing variable entry control according to the second aspect from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the second aspect,
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable pitch control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition;
A passing portion through which a game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass;
With
In the specific game, when the game ball passes through the passing portion, it is a configuration that is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball does not pass,
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of the specific games is the first game. A gaming machine comprising: a specifying unit that enables passage through the passage unit in a second specific game executed after the specific game.   2. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising means for allowing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game to pass through the passage portion in the second specific game. The gaming machine described. The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is allowed to stay without being discharged from the variable entry means in a predetermined area upstream of the passage portion. Possible retention means;
A stay release means for releasing the stay so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the second specific game;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: A distribution means capable of distributing the game balls that have entered the variable entry means to the stay means side and a side different from the stay means side;
A distribution control means for switching the distribution means between a first distribution mode capable of distributing game balls to the staying means side and a second distribution mode capable of distributing game balls to the different side;
With
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the stay is released by the stay release means. .   The stay release means does not release the stay in a situation where the variable entry means is in the first mode, and releases the stay in a situation in which the variable entrance means is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, further comprising means for performing the operation. First release means as the stay release means;
A second release means for releasing the stay so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the first specific game;
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, further comprising: Specific game ending means for ending the specific game based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the start of the specific game;
The specific game ending means is capable of continuing the specific game until the end condition is satisfied even if the game ball passes through the passing section before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6. A game state transition means for transitioning to a special game state capable of executing the specific game a plurality of times;
The special game state is configured such that the next specific game can be executed based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passage in one specific game.
The specifying means is configured such that, in the special gaming state, a game ball that has entered the variable pitching means in the first specific game can pass through the passage portion in the second specific game. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein The specifying means is:
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is allowed to stay without being discharged from the variable entry means in a predetermined area upstream of the passage portion. Possible retention means;
A stay release means for releasing the stay so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage part in the second specific game;
With
The stay releasing means can allow the game ball in the predetermined area to pass through the passage in the first specific game when the game ball has not yet passed through the passage at the specific timing of the first specific game. The game machine according to claim 8, further comprising means for releasing the stay.

Images